JP2021040838A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of effectively utilizing load applying means.SOLUTION: Since load applied from a resistance generator 650 to lifting plate member 630 can be switched according to the state of the lifting plate member 630, a single resistance generator 650 can give a plurality of types of impacts on movement of the lifting plate member 630. That is, the resistance generator 650 can be effectively utilized. As the difference in the state of the lifting plate member 630 adopted as a reference for switching the load of the resistance generator 650, a difference in arrangement or a difference in operation mode may be adopted.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 65

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a regulating means (load applying means) configured to be able to move the movement of the moving means that is displaced up and down to a position where the movement can be regulated (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-54856

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing the load applying means. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems, and an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of effectively utilizing the load applying means.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a movable moving means and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the moving means, and the load applying means is the moving means of the moving means. The load to be applied can be switched according to the state.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the load applying means applies a load in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means, and a moving direction of the moving means. It is possible to switch between the crossing state in which the load is applied in the intersecting direction and the load applied in.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the load applying means includes a load applying moving means capable of moving in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means, and the load thereof is provided. The imparting moving means is configured so as to be in contact with the moving means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the load applying means can be effectively utilized.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1, the load applying means is imparted to the moving means by changing the arrangement of the load applying means with respect to the moving path of the moving means. Since the load can be switched, a complicated shape for switching the load is not required, and the load applying means can be easily configured.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the load-applying moving means causes the moving means to appear and disappear in the moving path by a linear motion (linear motion). Since it can be configured to be executed, the movement width required for the load applying moving means in order to switch the mode of the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is an exploded perspective front view of a game board. It is sectional drawing of the game board in the VI-VI line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is a side view of the throwing unit. (A) is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit, and (b) is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit. (A) is a front view of the sorting unit, and (b) is a side view of the sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a sorting unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a sorting unit. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 9 (a), and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit in XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12 (a). (A) and (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the sorting unit in the range XIIIa of FIG. 12 (b). (A) is a front view of the passage unit, and (b) is a side view of the passage unit. It is an exploded perspective front view of a passage unit. It is an exploded perspective rear view of a passage unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the game board and the operation unit in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of a game board. It is a rear view of the game board. It is a front perspective view of a game board. It is a rear perspective view of the game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded front perspective view of a central constituent unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a central constituent unit. It is an enlarged front view of the game board in the range XXVI of FIG. FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in line XXVIII-XXVIII of FIG. It is an exploded front perspective view of a game board. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a game board. It is an enlarged front view of the game board in the range XXXI of FIG. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. 31. It is an exploded front perspective view of a distribution unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of a sorting unit. It is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in the range XXXV of FIG. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation unit. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in line XLIV-XLIV of FIG. 36. FIG. 4 is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view of an operating unit in the range XLV of FIG. 44. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in line XLIV-XLIV of FIG. 36. It is an exploded front perspective view of the operation unit. It is an exploded rear perspective view of the operation unit. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member, the elevating plate member, and the resistance generator in the range XLIXa of FIG. 47, and (b) is a front perspective view of the outer member in the range XLIXb of FIG. 47. (A) is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating plate member, the inner member, the displacement member and the rotational posture assisting member in the range La of FIG. 47, and (b) is the displacement member and the rotational posture assisting in the range Lb of FIG. 47. It is an exploded front perspective view of a member. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting operation production unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a light emitting operation production unit. It is an exploded front perspective view of a light emitting operation production unit. (A) is a front view of the intermediate connecting member on the right side, (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member in the direction of arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a), and FIG. 54 (c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member. ) Is a side view of the intermediate connecting member in the direction of the arrow LIVc, and FIG. 54 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member in the LIVd-LIVd line of FIG. 54 (a). It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LV-LV line of FIG. (A) to (c) are schematic side views of the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole and the curved elongated hole which schematically show the first elongated hole, the second elongated hole and the curved elongated hole. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. It is a front view of the operation unit. (A) to (c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion of the displacement member, the elongated hole and the support hole of the connected hole. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit in the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LXVII-LXVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LXVII-LXVII line of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the game board and the operation unit in the LXVII-LXVII line of FIG. (A) is a front view of the distribution unit according to the third embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. (A) is a front view of the distribution unit according to the fourth embodiment, and (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit. It is a partially enlarged front view of the game board in 5th Embodiment. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board in the line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 72. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LV-LV line of FIG. 36. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the pachinko machine in the line corresponding to the LV-LV line of FIG. 36. (A) to (c) are schematic side views of the guide portion and the L-shaped elongated hole schematically showing the guide portion and the L-shaped elongated hole in the seventh embodiment. (A) to (c) are the second elongated hole, the curved elongated hole, the third elongated hole, the second elongated hole and the curved upper portion of the first elongated hole and the lower portion of the first elongated hole in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic side view of the elongated hole, the third elongated hole, the upper portion of the first elongated hole, and the lower portion of the first elongated hole. (A) and (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member and the light emitting operation effect unit in the ninth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG. 37. (A) and (b) are front views of the rotating member and the posture detecting means in the tenth embodiment.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 16, one embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 as a first embodiment will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

In the following description, the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1 will be described with the front side of the paper surface as the front (front) side and the back side of the paper surface as the rear (rear) side. Further, with respect to the pachinko machine 10 in the state shown in FIG. 1, the upper side is the upper (upper) side, the lower side is the lower (lower) side, the right side is the right (right) side, and the left side is the left side (left). ) Side will be explained respectively. Further, the arrows UD, LR, and FB in the drawing (see, for example, FIG. 2) indicate the vertical direction, the horizontal direction, and the front-rear direction of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength (launching intensity) corresponding to the above, and the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower portion of the front surface of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as a "thousand-car box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray (not shown) is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a large number of nails for ball guidance (shown below the center frame 86, in the upper half of the game area) on the base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view. (Not shown) and windmill (not shown), rails 61, 62, general winning opening 63, first winning opening 64, second winning opening 140, variable winning device 65, through gate 67, variable display device unit. It is configured by assembling 80 and the like, and its peripheral edge is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1).

The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 can be visually recognized by the player from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 140, and the variable winning device 65 are arranged in a through hole formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and a tapping screw or the like is provided from the front side of the game board 13. Is fixed by.

The base plate 60 may be formed from a wooden plate member. In this case, on the outside of the center frame 86, various structures arranged on the back side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof can be shielded invisible to the player.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the rails flow down.

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probabilistic change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors can suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, a 15R probability variation jackpot, a 4R probability variation jackpot, and a 4R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "4R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 4 rounds, and then the probability shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the subsequent jackpot probability increases as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during so-called probability fluctuation (probability change), in other words, a game in which it is easy to shift to a special gaming state. It is the state of. In the high probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment, the jackpot probability increases during a predetermined number of fluctuations (100 fluctuations in the present embodiment), and the hit probability of the second symbol described later increases and the second Includes a game state in which a ball can easily win a prize in the winning opening 140. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In the "low probability state", the time saving state (during the time saving) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 140. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

In the present embodiment, when it is determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11 of the distribution device 300, which will be described later, in the first round of the jackpot game, the gaming state after the jackpot game ends changes by 100. It becomes a high probability state for the number of times. If it is not determined that the game ball has passed through the through hole of the probability variation detection sensor SE11, the game state after the jackpot game ends will be in a time-saving state for 100 fluctuations.

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the hit probability of the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 140a (electric accessory) attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened is changed, which is compared with the normal time. And a long time is set. When the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 140 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 140a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 140a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 140a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and at one time. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time when the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is opened and the number of times when the electric accessory 140a is opened per hit is not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B to display the third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81 of the variable display device unit 80 in front view.

In the present embodiment, the third symbol display device 81 is fastened and fixed to the back case fixed to the back surface of the game board 13, and the center frame 86 borders the window portion (center opening 60b) of the base plate 60. It is arranged. That is, when viewed from the front, it seems that the center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81, but in reality, the third symbol display device 81 and the center frame 86 are arranged apart from each other in the front-rear direction. Has been done.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of, for example, a large liquid crystal display having a size of 9 inches, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, upper, middle, and lower. Three symbol rows of are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) is displayed by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, whereas the first of the third symbol display devices 81 is A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 140 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 140 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 140a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board 13 in the left and right regions of the variable display device unit 80, and is configured so that a part of the balls launched on the game board 13 can pass through. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to two, and may be one, for example. Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the left and right sides of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, below the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, below the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 140 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 140, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is turned on due to the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

In addition, the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of winning balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 140, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 140 may be configured to be five.

An electric accessory 140a is attached to the second winning opening 140. The electric accessory 140a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 140a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 140. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 140.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. The symbol "" is easily displayed, and the number of times that the electric accessory 140a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 140a is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball is more likely to win the second winning opening 140 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 140. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 140 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 140, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 140 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 140. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 140a attached to the second winning opening 140 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 140 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 140 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 140.

Since the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment has a symmetrical configuration of the game board 13, it is possible to aim at the first winning opening 64 by "right-handed" or to aim at the second winning opening 140 by "left-handing". You can also aim. Therefore, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is a method of firing a ball to the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). Can be eliminated from changing to "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the hassle of changing the way the ball is hit.

A variable winning device 65 (see FIG. 2) is arranged below the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 140 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous for the player, and the player is given a larger amount of prize balls than usual as a game value (game value). Is done.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

A sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, or the like is provided in the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamp or the like attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with an out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, or 140 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 71.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged (in FIG. 2). Not shown).

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing sticker is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing sticker is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37A, 37B, a second symbol display device, a second symbol hold lamp, and an opening / closing plate 65b of a specific winning opening 65a (FIG. 2). A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory is connected to the front side with the lower side as an axis, and the MPU 201 is connected to these via the input / output port 205. It sends various commands and control signals to it.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. Other devices 228 include drive motors 648, 820, solenoid 651, and the like.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in an AC 24 volt voltage supplied from the outside, and has a 12 volt voltage for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power failure, power failure) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volts. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

The winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 arranged on the base plate of the game board 13 in the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 and 6. In the description of FIGS. 5 and 6, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective front view of the game board 13. Note that in FIG. 5, the illustration of units other than the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 (for example, the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2)) arranged on the base plate 60 is omitted.

As shown in FIG. 5, in the base plate 60, a through hole 60a penetrating in the thickness direction of the base plate 60 on the lower side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 5) of the central opening to which the center frame 86 (see FIG. 2) is attached. Is formed by router processing.

The through hole 60a is formed to be slightly smaller than the outer shape of the front unit 940 in front view, which will be described later, and the drive unit 960 and the specific winning opening unit 950 arranged in the front unit 940 are inserted inside.

The winning opening unit 930 is arranged on the base plate 60 from the game area (front) side, and the ball throwing unit 970 is arranged from the opposite (back) side of the game area, and each is fastened and fixed by a tapping screw or the like. The detailed configuration of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 will be described later.

FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the VI-VI line of FIG. FIG. 6 illustrates the arrangement of the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 in the assembled state.

As shown in FIG. 6, the passages of the front unit 940 and the throwing unit 970 are connected to each other in the front-rear direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 6), and the convex portion formed on the throwing unit 970 is formed. It is inserted into a protrusion formed on the front unit 940.

More specifically, the first throwing portion 942g and the inflow port 982d have a second protrusion 982d1 formed at the inflow port 982d inside the first recessed portion 942g1 formed in the first throwing portion 942g. Further, in the second throwing portion 942c and the side wall portion 981b, the protrusion 981b1 formed on the side wall portion 981b is arranged inside the second recessed portion 942c1 formed in the second throwing portion 942c. This makes it possible to easily align the front unit 940 and the ball throwing unit 970 when assembling to the base plate 60.

Next, the overall configuration of the throwing unit 970 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7 and 8. FIG. 7A is a front view of the ball throwing unit 970, and FIG. 7B is a side view of the ball throwing unit 970. FIG. 8A is an exploded perspective front view of the throwing unit 970, and FIG. 8B is an exploded perspective rear view of the throwing unit 970.

As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the throwing unit 970 is a distribution unit 980 arranged on the player side (game area side) and provided with a space through which the game ball can be inserted, and the game area of the distribution unit 980. It is formed with a passage unit 990 arranged on the opposite side to the above.

The distribution unit 980 is provided with openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) that are connected to the first winning port 64 and the second winning port 140 of the above-mentioned winning port unit 930, and the openings (inflow port 982d and side wall portion 981b) are provided. ) To the side opposite to the game area through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 can be received inside. A detailed description of the distribution unit 980 will be described later.

The passage unit 990 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the distribution unit 980. The passage unit 990 is provided with a plurality of openings (first insertion holes 991a to second insertion holes 991d) on the surface facing the distribution unit 980, and receives a game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from the openings. A detailed description of the passage unit 990 will be described later.

Next, the configuration of the distribution unit 980 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 9 to 12. 9 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 9 (b) is a side view of the distribution unit 980. FIG. 10 is an exploded perspective front view of the distribution unit 980, and FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective rear view of the distribution unit 980. 12 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the line XIIa-XIIa of FIG. 9 (a), and FIG. 12 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the sorting unit 980 in the XIIb-XIIb of FIG. 12 (a). Is.

As shown in FIGS. 9 to 12, the distribution unit 980 rotates between the back base 985, the front base 981 arranged on the player side of the back base 985, and the front base 981 and the back base. A distribution portion 983 arranged in a possible state and a cover member 987 arranged at a position corresponding to the distribution portion 983 on the back surface side of the back surface base 985 are mainly provided.

The back base 985 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and has a base portion 985a formed in a plate-like body and a plurality of openings (openings) penetrating the base portion 985a in the thickness direction. 985b to 985g), a recess 985h recessed on the other side (upper side in the gravity direction) of the plurality of openings in the gravity direction, and a housing portion 986b and a protrusion 986e protruding from the opposite surface of the recess 985h. Formed in preparation.

The base portion 985a is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and has a plurality of fastening holes 986c and 986d penetrating in a circular shape on the outer edge thereof, and an inclined surface inclined toward one side in the direction of gravity opposite to the front base 981 side. Formed with 986a. The fastening hole 986c is a hole for screwing a screw through which the front base 981 described later is inserted. Thereby, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened and fixed. Further, the fastening hole 986d is a hole for screwing a screw through which the passage unit 990, which will be described later, is inserted. As a result, the back base 985 (distribution unit 980) and the aisle unit 990 can be fastened and fixed.

The inclined surface 986a is formed at a position overlapping a part of the openings 985b to 985f described later on the other side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined surface 986a is formed at a position facing the inclined portion 982b of the front base 981 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Thereby, the flow direction of the game ball flowing down in the gravity direction can be guided to the openings 985b to 985f side. As a result, the game ball can be easily flowed into the openings 985b to 985f.

The recess 985h is recessed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 9B), and is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (horizontal direction in FIG. 9B) of the base portion 985a. Will be done. Further, the recess 985h is formed in a size capable of accommodating a part of the distribution portion 983 described later on the inside, and is provided with a bearing portion 985j protruding in an annular shape on the bottom surface. The bearing portion 985j is a hole into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted, and is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The openings 985b and 985c are formed at both ends of the base portion 985a in the lateral direction, and the size of the inner edge is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the openings 985b and 985c are formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985d is formed at a substantially central position in the lateral direction (FIG. 9 (b) left-right direction) of the base portion 985a, and the position in the gravity direction (FIG. 9 (b) vertical direction) is substantially the same as the opening 985b and the opening 985c. Set to position. Further, the opening 985d is formed so as to be inclined downward as the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is directed toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the openings 985b and 985c. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the side opposite to the front base 981 side.

The opening 985e is formed between the openings 985b and 985d, and the opening 985f is formed between the openings 985c and 985d. Further, the openings 985e and 985f are extended in the direction of gravity and flow into the inflow passages 985e1,985f1 in the space opened on the front base 981 side and the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 in the space opened on the opposite side to the front base 981 side. It is mainly provided with intermediate passages 985e2, 985f2 that communicate with the passages 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passages 985e3,985f3.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed so as to extend in the gravity direction, and the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) is communicated with the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and is formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. .. As a result, the game ball passing through the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 can flow into the intermediate passage 985e2,985f2.

Further, in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, recessed portions 985f4 are formed which are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the throwing direction (gravity direction) of the game ball. The recessed portion 985f4 is a notch for disposing the detection device SE3 described later inside the recessed portion 985f4, and is set substantially the same as the outer shape of the detection device SE3 in rear view. As a result, the detection device SE3 can be inserted and arranged from the back side (opposite side to the front base 981) of the base portion 985a.

The detection device SE3 is a device that detects the passage of the game ball, and a detection hole SE1a having an inner diameter slightly larger than that of the game ball is formed through the detection device SE1a in the thickness direction thereof. The detection hole SE1a is formed unevenly in either one or the other of the longitudinal direction of the detection device SE3 arranged in a horizontally long rectangular shape in the rear view, and the detection hole SE1a is not formed in either of the longitudinal directions. Alternatively, a detection board SE1b that controls the detection device SE3 is arranged on one side.

In the present embodiment, when the detection device SE3 detects the passage of the game ball, five prize balls are paid out and the lottery of the first symbol is executed. In response to this lottery, the third symbol display device 81 executes the variable display of the third symbol.

Further, in the detection device SE3, the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is set parallel to the extension direction of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2, and the internal space of the detection hole SE1a and the space of the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 substantially coincide with each other. Placed in position. As a result, when the game ball flows down from the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) to the one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) in the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, it can pass through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. it can. Thereby, the game ball passing through the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can be detected.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is formed so that the axial direction of the detection hole SE1a is parallel to the direction of gravity, the weight of the game ball can be easily used when the game ball is sent to the detection hole SE1a. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being caught in the connecting portion between the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 and the detection hole SE1a.

The recessed portions 985e4, 985f4 are formed so as to be connected to the spaces of the inflow passage 985e1,985f1 and the discharge passage 985e3,985f3. That is, the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 are formed by using the detection device SE3. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the length dimension of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2 in the gravity direction. As a result, it is possible to prevent the back base 985 from becoming larger in the direction of gravity.

The discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the intermediate passages 985e2 and 985f2, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. Further, the discharge passages 985e3 and 985f3 are connected to the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d of the passage unit 990, which will be described later, in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the intermediate passage 985e2, 985f2 can be made to flow into the discharge passage 985e3, 985f3, and can be passed through the space and sent to the passage unit 990.

The opening 985g is formed on one side of the opening 985d in the direction of gravity (lower side in the direction of gravity). Further, the opening 985g is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the side opposite to the front base 981 side, similarly to the opening 985d. As a result, the game ball flowing in from the front base 981 side can be rolled to the opposite side to the front base 981.

The inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1 are connected to the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 formed between the front base 981 and the back base 985, which will be described later, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through. To. As a result, the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 can flow into the inflow passages 985e1 and 985f1.

The accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings. Further, the accommodating portion 986b is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988b described later inside, and the inner diameter thereof is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b formed on the cylindrical body. Further, the protruding dimension of the accommodating portion 986b is set to be larger than the axial dimension of the magnetic body 988b. As a result, the magnetic material 988b can be accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b. Further, since the accommodating portion 986b is formed from a pair of semicircular rings, even if the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988b is formed to be minutely large due to a manufacturing error, the pair of semicircular rings are elastically deformed. A magnetic body 988b can be arranged.

The projecting portion 986e is projected in a columnar shape from a position opposite to the bearing portion 985j and the base portion 985a described above. Further, the projecting portion 986e is provided with a fastening hole recessed in a circular shape on the shaft thereof. The fastening hole is a hole for screwing the tip of a screw through which the cover member 987, which will be described later, is inserted. By screwing the screw with the cover member 987 in contact with the cover member 987, the cover member 987 is fastened to the back base 985. Can be fixed.

The magnetic body 988b is formed of a magnet, and by being arranged in the accommodating portion 986b, a magnetic field can be generated on the front base 981 side via the base portion 985a. As a result, the magnetic body 988c arranged in the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, can be repelled to facilitate the displacement of the distribution unit 983.

The front base 981 is formed of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. Further, the front base 981 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape larger than the back base 985 in the front view, and bulges from the base plate 981a and the base plate 981a to the player side (opposite side to the back base 986). It is formed mainly with a protrusion 982.

The base plate 981a is formed of a plate member having a substantially rectangular shape in front view, and has a plurality of insertion holes 981 g penetrating in the plate thickness direction on the outer peripheral edge thereof and a first guide wall projecting toward the back base 985 side. 981f and the second guide wall 981d, the second insertion hole 981e penetrating in the vicinity of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and a plate on one side (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982 in the gravity direction. It is mainly provided with a through hole 981c penetrating in the thickness direction.

The insertion hole 981g is a hole for inserting a screw (not shown) for fastening the assembled ball throwing unit 970 to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5), and is set to an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the tip portion of the screw. ..

The first guide wall 981f is formed in a semicircular ring shape, and is formed in pairs in the lateral direction with a bulging portion 982, which will be described later, sandwiched between them. Further, the first guide wall 981f is formed so that the open portion of the semicircle faces the substantially central side in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a.

The second guide wall 981d is formed in an annular shape and is formed at two locations in the lateral direction of the base plate 981a. Further, the second guide wall 981d is formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the bulging portion 982 described later, and a through hole 981c is formed between the two portions.

The inner edge shape of the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d is formed to be substantially the same as the outer shape around the fastening hole 986c of the back base 985 described above. As a result, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, the wall portion around the fastening hole 986c can be inserted inside the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981d, and the first guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f and the second guide wall 981f can be inserted. The guide wall 981d can be positioned.

The second insertion hole 981e is formed at the center of the semicircle of the first guide wall 981f and the center of the second guide wall 981d. The second insertion hole 981e is formed coaxially with the fastening hole 986c in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are assembled, and a screw is inserted from the front base 981 side and screwed into the fastening hole 986d. As a result, the front base 981 and the back base 985 can be fastened.

The through hole 981c is formed through a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the through hole 981c is formed with a side wall portion 981b erected on the side opposite to the back surface base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 9A) along the edge portion thereof. Further, the through hole 981c is a portion communicating with the second winning opening 140 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and the second winning opening 140 is in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at a position that overlaps with the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into.

The side wall portion 981b is formed so that the upright tip surface abuts on the second throwing portion 942c of the winning opening unit 930 in a state where the winning opening unit 930 and the throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. Further, in the side wall portion 981b, the rolling surface 981c1 on the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is located on the one side in the gravity direction with respect to the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a, and is located on the back base 985 side. It is formed with a downward slope toward it (see FIG. 6).

Further, the side wall portion 981b includes a protrusion 981b1 projecting from the erection tip surface. The protrusion 981b1 is formed at a position between the rolling surface 981c1 and the radius separation of the game ball in the direction of gravity. As a result, when the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c, the game ball can be prevented from being caught between the rolling portion 943a and the through hole 981c. A detailed description of the case where the game ball is thrown from the end surface 943a1 of the rolling portion 943a to the rolling surface 981c1 of the through hole 981c will be described later.

The bulging portion 982 is formed in a dome shape that bulges from the base plate 981a, is set to a size that allows the game ball to be inserted inside, and the game ball that flows in from the inflow port 982d passes through the inside thereof. The ball throwing passage TR0 is formed, and the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 branching from the throwing passage TR0 are provided. The bulging portion 982 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and is erected at an inflow port 982d formed by cutting out the upper end portion in the direction of gravity and bent toward the back base 985 side at a substantially intermediate position in the front view. It is mainly provided with an upright wall 982a to be provided and recesses 982e to 982j recessed at a plurality of locations on the other side in the direction of gravity.

The inflow port 982d is notched and formed in a substantially U-shape in front view. Further, the inflow port 982d has the inner edge portion in the rolling direction of the game ball that has flowed into the first winning port 64 of the winning port unit 930 in a state where the winning port unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are mounted on the base plate 60. It is formed at overlapping positions.

Further, the inflow port 982d is provided with a second protrusion 982d1 projecting to the side opposite to the back base 985 side at the edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The second protrusion 982d1 is formed in the shape of the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1 of the winning opening unit 930 described above, and when the winning opening unit 930 and the ball throwing unit 970 are arranged on the base plate 60, the first protrusion 982d1 is formed. The second protrusion 982d1 is brought into contact with the inner edge of the recessed portion 942g1.

Further, the distance dimension L14 (see FIG. 9A) from the second protrusion 982d1 to the end face of the inflow port 982d on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is the first thrown ball from the inner edge of the first recessed portion 942g1. The distance dimension to the inner edge on one side in the gravity direction of the portion 942 g is set to be larger than the distance dimension L35 (see FIG. 87 (b)). As a result, when the game ball thrown into the first throwing portion 942g through the first winning opening 64 flows into the inflow port 982d, the inflow port 982d (bulging portion 982) and the first throwing portion 942g are brought into contact with each other. It can be hard to get caught in between.

The erection wall 982a is formed in a rectangular shape that is separated from the outer edge shape of the bulging portion 982 by a predetermined distance in the front view. Further, the erection wall 982a is formed to be formed on the lower side in the gravity direction of the inflow port 982d, and is provided with an abutting portion 982a1 formed in a triangular shape in the erection direction on the upper side in the gravitational direction.

In the erection wall 982a, the distance L16 (see FIG. 12B) in the horizontal direction from the inner edge of the outer peripheral portion of the bulging portion 982 is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball, and the game ball is set between the two facing each other. The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the space through which the passage can pass are formed.

The first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are formed on the downstream side of the distribution unit 983, which will be described later, and a game ball passing through the distribution unit 983 is sent to either of them. The distribution unit 983 is set so that the game balls flowing into the inflow port 982d can be alternately thrown into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. As a result, it is possible to prevent the throwing of the game ball flowing into the first winning opening 64 from becoming monotonous. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from being impaired.

On the other side of the erection wall 982a in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction), a bearing portion 982c is formed so as to project from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 to the back surface base 985 side in an annular shape. The bearing portion 982c is a portion that supports the other end side of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the inner diameter is set to be substantially the same as the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. Therefore, by inserting the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the other end side of the shaft member 988a can be supported.

Further, as described above, since one end side of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j of the back base 985, when the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined, one end of the shaft member 988a is inserted into the bearing portion 985j. By inserting the shaft member 988a and inserting the other end side of the shaft member 988a into the bearing portion 982c, the shaft member 988a can be supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985.

The contact portion 982a1 is formed on the rotation locus of the distribution portion 983, which will be described later, and the rotational displacement amount of the distribution portion 983 is regulated by the contact portion 983a of the distribution portion 983. A detailed description of the contact state between the contact portion 982a1 and the distribution portion 983 will be described later.

The recess 982e and the recess 982f are recessed in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). Further, inside the recess 982e and the recess 982f, a first branch passage BK1 or a second branch passage BK2 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 is formed.

The first branch passage BK1 communicates with the opening 985b of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the first branch passage BK1 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985b of the back base 985.

The second branch passage BK2 communicates with the opening 985c of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the second branch passage BK2 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985c of the back base 985.

The recess 982h and the recess 982j are recessed in the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 from the inner side surface of the bulging portion 982 on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction). That is, the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 are extended to one side in the direction of gravity by the amount of the recess 982h and the recess 982j.

The first passage TR1 communicates with the opening 985e of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the first passage TR1, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d flows in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985e of the back base 985.

The second passage TR2 communicates with the opening 985f of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, in the second passage TR2, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 982d can flow in, and the game ball that has flowed in can flow into the opening 985f of the back base 985.

The recess 982g is formed between the recess 982h and the recess 982j, and the recessing direction is set parallel to the extending direction of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Further, inside the recess 982g, a third branch passage BK3 in a space communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed. Therefore, since the third branch passage BK3 communicating with the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is formed between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2, the distribution unit 980 can be downsized. ..

The third branch passage BK3 communicates with the opening 985d of the back base 985 in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. Therefore, the third branch passage BK3 is formed so as to be able to accept the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and the accepted game ball can flow into the opening 985d of the back base 985. ..

The inclined portion 982b is formed on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the bulging portion 982, and is extended toward the back base 985 side toward one side in the gravity direction. Further, the inclined portion 982b is formed at a position facing the opening 985f from the opening 985b in a state where the front base 981 and the back base 985 are combined. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1, the second passage TR2, the first branch passage BK1, the second branch passage BK2, and the third branch passage BK3 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b, so that the game ball flowing down is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b. Can be easily guided to the openings 985b to 985f and flow into the openings 985b to 985f.

The guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are connected to the recesses 982h and the recesses 982j and the inclined portion 982b, and the erected tip surface is inclined downward toward the back base 985 side (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 9B). As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the erected tip surface of the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 and guided to the opening 985e and the opening 985f side to guide the opening 985e and the opening. It can be easily flowed into 985f.

Further, the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b. As a result, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is brought into contact with the inclined portion 982b and is guided to the back base 985 side while colliding with the guide portion 982h1, 982j1 to open the game ball at the opening 985e. And it can be made to flow into the opening 985f. Further, since the standing distance of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be reduced by the amount of the inclination of the inclined portion 982b, the rigidity of the guide portion 982h1,982j1 can be increased to improve the durability.

Here, as described above, the distribution unit 980 (ball throwing unit 970) is visible to the player via the front unit 940 (winning opening unit 930) arranged on the player side. Therefore, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through the front unit 940 becomes difficult to see from the player side. Further, when the guide portion 982h1,982j1 is erected on the front side of the opening 985e and the opening 985f, the game ball flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 is played by the thickness of the guide portion 982h1,982j1. There was a problem that it became difficult for people to see it.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the guide portions 982h1 and 982j1 are formed in connection with the inclined portion 982b, the vertical dimension of the inclined portion 982b can be reduced. Therefore, the game balls thrown into the openings 985e and 985f (the game balls flowing down the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2) can be easily visually recognized even in the state of passing through the front unit 940. That is, in the present embodiment, the inclined portion 982b is inclined so as to be located on the back base 985 side toward the flow direction of the game ball, so that the rigidity can be secured and the game ball can be guided while being guided. Since the thickness of the portions 982h1 and 982j1 in the front-rear direction can be reduced, the visibility of the game ball can be ensured.

The distribution portion 983 is set to a thickness slightly smaller than the dimension between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other, and is formed in a substantially T-shape in front view. Further, the distribution portion 983 penetrates the connecting portion between the acting portion 983a on one side of the T-shape, the intermediate plate 983b protruding from the substantially central position in the extending direction of the acting portion 983a, and the acting portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b. The through hole 983c to be formed, the abutting portion 983d that bulges in a circular shape around the axis of the through hole 983c, and the wall portion 983e formed by connecting the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b to the back surface base 985 side. It is formed mainly with and.

The through hole 983c is a hole into which a shaft member 988a supported between the front base 981 and the back base 985 facing each other is inserted, and is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a. As a result, when assembling the front base 981 and the back base 985, the shaft member 988a is inserted into the through hole 983c of the distribution portion 983, so that the front base 981 and the back base can be rotated in a state where the distribution portion 983 can be rotated. It is arranged between the facing surfaces of the 985.

The intermediate plate 983b is formed so as to extend outward in the radial direction of the through hole 983c, and in a state where the displacement of the distribution portion 983 is restricted by rotating to one or the other, the intermediate plate 983b is formed from the tip thereof. The separation distance L17 to the inside (see FIG. 12B) is set to be smaller than the diameter of the game ball. As a result, the throwing of the game ball is restricted to either one or the other of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2. Further, in the intermediate plate 983b, the distribution portion 983 is rotated around the through hole 983c, so that the throwing of the game ball is restricted to one of the first passage TR1 and the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Can be switched to the regulated state.

The working portion 983a is formed so as to extend in a direction substantially orthogonal to the extending direction of the intermediate plate 983b in the front view. Further, the action portion 983a is set so that the connection position with the contact portion 983d is one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. As a result, the game ball sent to the distribution unit 983 via the inflow port 982d is in a state in which a load is applied to the action unit 983a side. As a result, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c.

The wall portion 983e is connected to the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b, and is formed in a substantially semicircular plate shape in the axial direction of the through hole 983c. The wall portion 983e is formed so as to project outward from the working portion 983a and the intermediate plate 983b in a direction orthogonal to the axis of the through hole 983c, and the thickness dimension is larger than the recessed dimension of the recess 985h of the back base 985 described above. Set small. Therefore, the wall portion 983e can be arranged inside the recess 985h in a state where the distribution portion 983 is arranged between the back surface base 985 and the front base 981. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown from the inflow port 982d into the distribution unit 980 from being caught in the recess 985h, thereby hindering the flow of the game ball.

Further, the wall portion 983e includes an accommodating portion 983e1 which is on the back surface side of the intermediate plate 983b and is recessed from the through hole 983c to the outer end portion in the radial direction toward the intermediate plate 983b side. The accommodating portion 983e1 is a portion for accommodating the magnetic body 988c formed in the columnar body inside, and is recessed in a circular shape having an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the magnetic body 988c. Further, the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed from the back base 985 side toward the front base 981 side, and the magnetic body 988c is accommodated internally from the back base 985 side.

The magnetic body 988c is formed of a magnet and is arranged in a state of repelling the magnetic body 988b disposed on the back surface base 985. As a result, in the distribution portion 983, a magnetic force is applied from the magnetic body 988b in which the magnetic body 988c is arranged on the back surface base 985, and the magnetic body 988c is rotated about the through hole 983c as an axis to extend the extending direction of the working portion 983a to one or the other. Can be tilted to.

Further, since the magnetic body 988c and the magnetic body 988b are arranged in a repulsive state and the accommodating portion 983e1 is recessed toward the front side, the magnetic body 988c to be inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is the accommodating portion 983e1. It is possible to prevent the person from getting out of the. That is, since the portion for locking the magnetic body 988c inserted into the accommodating portion 983e1 is not required, the structure of the distribution portion 983 can be simplified and the arrangement of the magnetic body 988c in the distribution portion 983 can be simplified.

The magnetic force of the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c is set to a magnetic force smaller than the load of the game ball. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball thrown inside the distribution unit 980 from being magnetically attached to the magnetic body 988b and the magnetic body 988c and staying inside the distribution unit 980.

The cover member 987 is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape when viewed from above, and is arranged on the side opposite to the front base 981 side of the recess 985h of the back base 985. Further, the cover member 987 is formed to include two first recesses 987a and second recesses 987b that are recessed in a circular shape in the front view in the direction of gravity.

The first recess 987a is a portion for accommodating the accommodating portion 986b of the back base 985 described above inside, and is set to an inner diameter substantially the same as the outer diameter of the accommodating portion 986b. Therefore, by accommodating the tip of the accommodating portion 986b in the first recess 987a with the magnetic body 988b accommodating inside the accommodating portion 986b as described above, the magnetic body 988b accommodated inside the accommodating portion 986b is accommodated. It is possible to prevent the portion 986b from coming out.

The second recess 987b is provided with a through hole 987b1 for fastening and fixing to the back surface base 985 on the bottom surface of the recess. Further, the inner shape of the recessed portion of the second recessed portion 987b is formed to have substantially the same inner diameter as the outer diameter of the protruding portion 986e of the back surface base 985 described above. As a result, the cover member 987 can accommodate the second recess 987b in the protruding portion 986e of the back base 985 and can be positioned and arranged, and in the positioned state, the screw is inserted into the fastening hole of the protruding portion 986e via the through hole 987b1. Can be concluded.

Next, with reference to FIG. 13, the operation of the distribution unit 983 when the game ball flows into the distribution unit 980 from the inflow port 982d will be described. 13 (a) and 13 (b) are partially enlarged cross-sectional views of the distribution unit 980 in the range XIIIa of FIG. 12 (b). In the following, the acting unit 983a of the distribution unit 983 is displaced from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 to the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2. Only the case will be described, and the description of the case of restricting the throwing of the game ball to one of the first passage TR1 from the state of restricting the throwing of the game ball to the other of the second passage TR2 will be omitted.

As shown in FIGS. 13 (a) and 13 (b), before the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 (before the game ball comes into contact with the action unit 983a), it is arranged in the distribution 983 as described above. When the magnetic body 988c provided repels the magnetic body 988b (see FIG. 10), the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is in a state of being tilted toward the second passage TR2. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the second passage TR2 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981 (see FIG. 13A).

When the game ball is thrown to the distribution unit 983 in this state, the game ball is thrown between the intermediate plate 983b and the action unit 983a on the first passage TR1 side. As described above, since the connection position of the working portion 983a with the contact portion 983d is set to one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) with respect to the connection position of the intermediate plate 983b with the contact portion 983d. The load of the game ball can be applied to the acting portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 13B, the distribution portion 983 is rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c, and the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c is tilted toward the first passage TR1. It is said that. The amount of rotation is regulated by the action portion 983a on the first passage TR1 side coming into contact with the contact portion 982a1 of the front base 981. Further, in this case, the repulsive direction of the magnetic body 988c is switched from the state in which the intermediate plate 983b radially outer from the through hole 983c acts on the second passage TR2 side to the state in which it acts on the first passage TR1 side.

Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can be rotationally displaced about the through hole 983c by utilizing the load of the game ball and the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c. Further, since the direction of the repulsive force of the magnetic body 988c is switched, the state in which the distribution unit 983 is rotated can be maintained. Therefore, the distribution unit 983 can displace the inclination direction of the intermediate plate 983b each time the game ball is thrown, and throw the game ball into the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 one by one.

Next, the configuration of the passage unit 990 will be described with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16. 14 (a) is a front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 14 (b) is a side view of the passage unit 990. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective front view of the passage unit 990, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective rear view of the passage unit 990.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, the passage unit 990 includes a first passage member 991 having a plurality of openings opened on the distribution unit 980 side and a first passage member 991 arranged in the first passage member 991. A second passage member 992 that throws a passing game ball, a third passage member 993 that is arranged on the second passage member 992 and throws a game ball that has passed through the second passage member 992, a second passage member 992, and a second passage member 992. It is mainly provided with a detection device SE4 arranged between the three passage members 993.

The first passage member 991 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and is formed on the second passage member 992 side with a predetermined width. Further, the first passage member 991 has a first insertion hole 991a formed through the distribution unit 980 on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and one side of the first insertion hole 991a in the gravity direction (lower in the gravity direction). The second insertion hole 991b formed through the side), the third insertion hole 991c and the fourth insertion hole 991d formed through the second insertion hole 991b on both sides in the horizontal direction, and the outer periphery in the front view. It is mainly provided with through holes 991f which are formed through a plurality of circular through holes.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

The third insertion hole 991c is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the third insertion hole 991c is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985e of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (first passage TR1) and passes through the opening 985e can be received in the third insertion hole 991c.

Further, the third insertion hole 991c includes recessed portions 991c1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991c1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991c1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, when the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined, the detection board SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980 can be received inside the recessed portion 991c1 of the passage unit 990, so that the distribution unit 980 can be received. And the passage unit 990 can be positioned. As a result, it is possible to prevent a part of the detection device SE3 from projecting to the outside, and to reduce the size of the ball throwing unit 970 as a whole.

The third insertion hole 991c is provided with a projecting portion 991c2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is adjacent in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the matching second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the third insertion hole 991c can collide with the projecting portion 991c2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (left direction in FIG. 14A).

The fourth insertion hole 991d is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is formed at a position where the internal space of the opening 985f of the distribution unit 980 is connected in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 (second passage TR2) and passes through the opening 985f can be received in the fourth insertion hole 991d.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d includes recessed portions 991d1 that are recessed on both sides in the horizontal direction on the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction). The recessed portion 991d1 is a portion that internally accommodates the detection substrate SE1b of the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, and is formed to have substantially the same dimensions as the outer shape of the detection device SE3. As a result, the detection board SE1b side of the detection device SE3 can be protected by the recessed portion 991d1, and the detection device SE3 can be prevented from being illegally operated from the outside in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. it can.

Further, the fourth insertion hole 991d is provided with a projecting portion 991d2 protruding from the second insertion hole 991b side at the inner edge of the second passage member 992 side, and the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is in the horizontal direction. It is formed so as to be inclined downward in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b adjacent to the second insertion hole 991b. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the fourth insertion hole 991d can collide with the projecting portion 991d2 and can be rolled in a direction away from the second insertion hole 991b (right direction in FIG. 14A).

The second passage member 992 is formed in a substantially T-shaped plate shape that is upside down in the front view, and has a fifth insertion hole 992b that penetrates the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) and a fifth insertion hole thereof. It is mainly provided with a sixth insertion hole 992c penetrating one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) of the 992b and an erection wall 992a erected on the inner peripheral edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The fifth insertion hole 992b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the fifth insertion hole 992b is formed at a position where the internal space of the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 is connected in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. As a result, the game ball passing through the first insertion hole 991a of the first passage member 991 can be received in the fifth insertion hole 992b.

The erection wall 992a is erected from the entire edge of the fifth insertion hole 992b toward the third passage member 993 side. Further, the erection wall 992a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the third passage member 993 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the fifth insertion hole 992b can be rolled to the third passage member 993 side (right side in FIG. 14B).

The outer peripheral surface of the upright wall 992a is formed with an engaging portion 992d protruding in the horizontal direction and a protruding wall 992e protruding in the horizontal direction from the end on the first passage member 991 side. The engaging portion 992d is formed in an L shape so as to project in the horizontal direction and the tip thereof bends toward the third passage member 993. The wiring of the detection device SE4 and the detection device SE3 arranged in the distribution unit 980, which will be described later, is inserted into the engaging portion 992d while facing the erection wall 992a. As a result, the wiring of the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be locked, so that the detection device SE3 and the detection device SE4 can be prevented from coming out of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990.

The projecting wall 992e is formed so as to project in a semicircular shape in the front view on both sides of the erecting wall 992a in the horizontal direction, and includes through holes 992e1 penetrating the axis of the semicircle. Further, the projecting wall 992e is formed at a position facing the annular projection 991g of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined, and the through hole 992e1 is formed. It is located coaxially with the fastening hole 991g1. As a result, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed by inserting the screw into the through hole 992e1 from the second passage member 992 side and screwing the screw into the fastening hole 991g1.

The sixth insertion hole 992c is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the sixth insertion hole 992c is formed at a position where the internal space thereof is connected to the internal space of the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 in a state where the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 are combined. To. As a result, the game ball passing through the second insertion hole 991b of the first passage member 991 can be received in the sixth insertion hole 992c.

Further, around the sixth insertion hole 992c, a guide wall 992c1 erected toward the third passage member 993 side is formed. The guide wall 992c1 is connected to the first wall portion 992c2 erected on one side of the sixth insertion hole 992c in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) and the end portion of the first wall portion 992c2 in the extending direction and also has gravity. It is formed from a second wall portion 992c3 extending in the direction.

The first wall portion 992c2 and the second wall portion 992c3 are positioning wall surfaces for arranging the detection device SE4, and are located between the standing wall 993e and the engaging portion 993d formed on the third passage member 993. The dimensions are set to be substantially the same as the dimensions facing the detection device SE4.

Further, the detection device SE4 is arranged at a position where the internal space of the detection hole SE1a is connected to the internal space of the sixth insertion hole 992c. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c passes through the detection hole SE1a, is detected by the detection device SE4, and is sent to the third passage member 993 side.

Further, the second passage member 992 includes an annular protrusion 992f projecting from the sixth passage member 993 side at a position separated from the sixth insertion hole 992c in the horizontal direction (left-right direction in FIG. 14A). The annular protrusion 992f is provided with a fastening hole 992f1 having a circular hole on its axis. The fastening hole 992f1 is a hole for screwing a screw through which the third passage member 993 is inserted, whereby the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

The first insertion hole 991a is formed in a square whose side is larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed at a position where the opening 985d of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985d can be received in the first insertion hole 991a.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the first insertion hole 991a can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

Further, the first insertion hole 991a is formed by connecting an annular protrusion 991g having a fastening hole 991g1 for screwing a screw for inserting the second passage member 992 to the outer peripheral portion. Thereby, the first passage member 991 and the second passage member 992 can be fastened and fixed.

The second insertion hole 991b is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape in the front view, and the width dimension in the lateral direction is set to be larger than the diameter of the game ball. Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed at a position where the opening 985 g of the distribution unit 980 and the internal space are connected to each other in a state where the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 are combined. As a result, the game ball that flows down the inside of the distribution unit 980 and passes through the opening 985 g can be received in the second insertion hole 991b.

Further, the second insertion hole 991b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined downward toward the second passage member 992 side. As a result, the game ball thrown into the second insertion hole 991b can be rolled to the second passage member 992 side.

The third passage member 993 is formed in the shape of a horizontally long rectangular plate when viewed from the front. The third passage member 993 includes a seventh insertion hole 993a formed through substantially an intermediate position in the longitudinal direction, a guide wall 993b erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a, and an edge portion on the other side in the gravity direction. Mainly provided with an erection wall 993e erected on the second passage member 992 side, an engaging portion 993d protruding in the longitudinal direction, and a recess 993c recessed on the side surface on the second passage member 992 side. It is formed.

The seventh insertion hole 993a is formed in a square shape having one side larger than the diameter of the game ball when viewed from the front. Further, the seventh insertion hole 993a is formed at a position connected to the internal space of the detection device SE4 arranged in the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined. As a result, the game ball that has passed through the seventh insertion hole 993a of the second passage member 992 and the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4 can be received in the seventh insertion hole 993a.

The guide wall 993b is erected from the edge of the seventh insertion hole 993a in three directions excluding the other side in the gravity direction (upper side in the gravity direction) toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side. Further, the guide wall 993b is formed so that the inner surface on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in the gravity direction) is inclined upward toward the second passage member 992 side (downwardly inclined toward the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side). Will be done. As a result, the game ball thrown into the seventh insertion hole 993a can be rolled to the side opposite to the second passage member 992 side (right side in FIG. 14B).

Further, as shown in FIG. 14B, the third passage member 993 is arranged on one side in the gravity direction (lower side in FIG. 14B) of the standing wall 992a of the second passage member 992. As described above, since the other side (upper side in FIG. 14B) of the third passage member 993 is opened, the third passage member 993 can be arranged closer to the erection wall 992a by that amount. As a result, the opening 985d and the opening 985g of the above-mentioned distribution unit 980 can be brought close to each other, and the outer shapes of the distribution unit 980 and the passage unit 990 in the gravity direction can be miniaturized.

In the erection wall 993e, in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the first wall portion 992c2 is the detection hole of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the short side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of SE1a. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the direction of gravity.

Further, on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) to which the game ball is thrown, a first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side in the gravity direction of the detection device SE4 is formed. As a result, the game ball passing through the sixth insertion hole 992c can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4.

That is, since the detection hole SE1a is formed to have a size slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball for the purpose of preventing the player from cheating, the inside of the detection hole SE1a is caused by a slight misalignment of the height of the rolling surface of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first wall portion 992c2 for positioning the lower side of the detection device SE4 in the direction of gravity is located on the upstream side (second passage member 992 side) where the game ball is thrown. Since it is formed, it is possible to prevent the heights of the sixth insertion hole 992c, the detection hole SE1a, and the rolling surface from being displaced from each other. As a result, the game ball through which the sixth insertion hole 992c is inserted can be easily inserted into the detection hole SE1a.

The engaging portion 993d is formed so as to project in the longitudinal direction of the third passage member 993, and includes a bent portion 993d1 that bends toward the second passage member 992 at the protruding tip thereof. In the bent portion 993d1, in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, the distance dimension between the second passage member 992 facing the second wall portion 992c3 is the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE4. It is set to be substantially the same as the distance dimension on the longitudinal side in the direction orthogonal to the axis of. As a result, the detection device SE4 can be positioned in the horizontal direction.

The recess 993c is formed at a position facing the annular projection 992f of the second passage member 992 in a state where the second passage member 992 and the third passage member 993 are combined, and the outer diameter of the annular projection 992f is formed. It is formed into a larger inner edge shape. Further, the recess 993c is provided with a through hole 993c1 formed coaxially with the fastening hole 992f1 of the annular protrusion 992f on the concave bottom surface thereof. As a result, the annular protrusion 992f of the second passage member 992 is inserted into the recess 993c, and the through hole 993c1 is inserted from the third passage member 993 side and screwed into the fastening hole 992f1 to screw the screw into the second passage. The member 992 and the third passage member 993 can be fastened and fixed.

According to the throwing unit 970 configured as described above, the throwing unit 970 is formed of a unit different from the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140, and the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 140 are formed. Since it is arranged on the back side (opposite side to the game area) of the front unit 940 provided with the above, the game of flowing down the game area by exchanging the throwing unit 970 (distribution unit 980) and arranging another unit. It can be a different game form without affecting the flow of the ball.

Next, a second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 69. In the first embodiment, the case where the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 of the distribution unit 980 are formed as a passage that guides the ball backward without returning the ball forward has been described, but the distribution of the second embodiment has been described. The unit 300 is configured to allow the ball to move forward. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

First, the details of the configuration of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 to 35, and then the details of the configuration of the operation unit 500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 36 to 69.

FIG. 17 is a front exploded perspective view of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the second embodiment. As shown in FIG. 17, an internal opening is formed in the center frame 86 arranged inside the game board 13, and the player can visually recognize the operation unit 500 through the internal opening of the center frame 86. ..

In addition to this, in the present embodiment, since the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, the visual mode is not limited to the visual mode through the internal opening of the center frame 86, and the center frame 86 The operation unit 500 can be visually recognized via the base plate 60 located on the outside of the.

18 is a front view of the game board 13, FIG. 19 is a rear view of the game board 13, FIG. 20 is a front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 21 is a rear view of the game board 13. It is a figure. In FIG. 18, the wind turbine FS1 and the nail KG1 which are not shown in FIG. 2 are also shown.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, an upper connecting member 270 that replaces the function of the nail that distributes the flow path of the ball is provided, and the nail KG1 is arranged within the range in which the upper connecting member 270 is arranged. Absent.

This makes it possible to avoid the impermeable nature of the nail KG1 acting as a drawback. In other words, by removing the nail KG1 from the position above the center frame 86 (the position above the center frame 86 and below the outer rail 62) where the upper connecting member 270 is arranged, the position above the center frame 86. Since it is possible to prevent the light passing through the center frame 86 from being reflected or blocked by the nail KG1 in various directions, it is possible to improve the visibility of the light effect at the position above the center frame 86. The mode of the light effect at the upper position of the center frame 86 will be described later.

In FIG. 19, the shape of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is formed from a shape that is recessed upward at the left and right center positions, and electricity connected to the illuminated substrate 251 arranged in the recessed portion. A sensor cover 254, which is also used to hold the wiring DH1, is shown.

As shown in FIG. 19, at the lower position of the center frame 86, on the back side of the base plate 60, a gutter 480 forming a flow path of a ball entering the general winning opening 63 and an upper gutter 480 thereof. A wide decorative member 490 formed in a shape straddling the rear side of the first winning opening 64 is fastened and fixed.

The gutter 480 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material. This makes it possible to prevent the gutter 480 from blocking the incident light from the back surface side. In addition, it is possible to improve the visibility of the ball that enters the general winning opening 63 and flows down the gutter 480 in the front view.

The wide decorative member 490 is formed of a colored transparent (blue in this embodiment) resin material. As a result, the wide decorative member 490 can be made conspicuous to the player who visually recognizes the game area from the front.

The wide decorative member 490 is provided with insertion screw insertion holes 491 at the left and right ends. A fastening screw screwed into the gutter 480 is inserted into the insertion hole 491, and the wide decorative member 490 is fastened and fixed to the gutter 480 by the fastening screw. As a result, the attention to the wide decorative member 490 can be connected to the attention to the sphere flowing down the gutter 480.

The wide decorative member 490 is formed by a pair of left and right inclined forming portions formed at an inclination angle similar to that of the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) behind the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning opening 63. It includes a 492 and a central forming portion 493 extending in the left-right direction on the left-right inner side of the inclined forming portion 492.

The inclination forming portion 492 is arranged so that the upper surface of the member is along the plate-shaped portion (ceiling plate portion 455) that rolls the ball above the general winning opening 63 in the front view. Therefore, even when the plate-shaped portion that rolls the sphere is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, it is possible to make the sphere appear as if it is rolling on the inclined forming portion 492 in the front view. It is possible to easily grasp the flow path.

The central forming portion 493 constitutes the ceiling portion of the flow path (inclined extending portion 315 described later) of the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball from falling out of the flow path, and even when the flow path of the ball entering the first winning opening 64 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, it is colored and transparent. The central forming portion 493 formed from the resin material of the above makes it easy to grasp the flow path of the sphere from the front view.

In FIG. 20, a resin member such as an upper connecting member 270 having a portion overhanging the game area and being formed of a light-transmitting resin material and a winning opening component 400 is shown above and below the center frame 86. ing. These resin members can produce the effect of stably maintaining the flow-down mode of the sphere, which will be described in detail later. In FIG. 20, the nail KG1 and the wind turbine FS1 are not shown.

To explain the outline first, one of the common effects of the resin members such as the upper connecting member 270 and the winning opening constituent member 400 is that they can be easily repaired when they are cracked or chipped. This effect is not achieved when using commonly used metal nails.

In the case of a nail planted on the base plate 60, the nail may be bent or broken when a ball collides with the nail or when an operator accidentally overloads the nail. If it bends, it may be possible to restore it by bending it to the opposite side by the same amount, but if it bends, it is difficult to restore it.

In the first place, the nails are driven into the base plate 60 by an automatic machine, and the nails are not driven individually one by one, but are generally driven into the entire game board at once. Therefore, even if only one nail is missing, it is difficult to re-strike a single missing nail while the other nails are planted, and it is necessary to replace the entire base plate 60. there is a possibility.

At this time, since the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, and the like are assembled to the base plate 60, these assembled members may be reassembled to the replacement base plate 60, or these members may be reassembled. It is necessary to replace each one, and in any case, the repair cost tends to increase.

On the other hand, if a part of the resin member such as the upper connecting member 270 or the winning opening component 400 is cracked or chipped, the repair can be completed by replacing the resin member with a new member, and the base plate 60 is replaced. You don't have to. Further, since the resin member is independent of the rails 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc., there is no cost related to the rail 61, 62, the outer edge member 73, etc. when the resin member is replaced, so that the repair cost is not incurred. Can be suppressed.

In FIG. 21, with respect to the illuminated substrate 251 and the substrate holding plate 252 arranged above the center frame 86, the substrate holding plate 252 is arranged so as to be within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and the substrate holding plate 252 is arranged. It is shown that the illuminated substrate 251 arranged on the front side of the base plate 60 is arranged so as to fit inside the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, but the details will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 21, a plurality of fitting portions 60c are provided so as to project from the back surface of the base plate 60 toward the back surface side in a cylindrical shape whose outer shape is tapered. The fitting portion 60c has a female screw formed on the inner diameter side, and functions as a portion into which the fastening screw is screwed when the operating unit 500 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60.

FIG. 22 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 23 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the game board 13 includes a base plate 60, a central configuration unit 240 arranged inside the base plate 60 and having a center frame 86, and an upper portion of the central configuration unit 240. It includes an upper connecting member 270 that connects the base plate 60 and limits the flow direction of a ball that flows down the game area, and a thin plate member 290 that is arranged between the upper connecting member 270 and the central configuration unit 240. ..

The details of the central configuration unit 240 will be described later, but as shown in an enlarged view in FIG. 22, the central configuration unit 240 is formed with a fixing portion 244 used for positioning and fixing the thin plate member 290.

FIG. 24 is an exploded front perspective view of the central configuration unit 240, and FIG. 25 is an exploded rear perspective view of the central configuration unit 240. The central configuration unit 240 is a unit that is assembled in an annular shape when it is arranged in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, has a center frame 86, and guides the flow of the sphere.

The central constituent unit 240 includes an upper constituent member 241 that constitutes an upper portion of the center frame 86, and a lower constituent member 261 that constitutes a lower portion of the center frame 86. The upper component 241 and the lower component 261 each form the upper and lower halves of a ring shape from a light-transmitting resin material, thereby surrounding the third symbol display device in a front view in the assembled state (see FIG. 18). The center frame 86 is configured.

In this way, the size of the resin mold required for molding the resin member can be reduced by forming the center frame 86 in an annular shape by combining a plurality of members instead of forming the center frame 86 in an annular shape by itself. .. As a result, the manufacturing cost of the resin mold can be suppressed.

For example, the shape of the upper edge portion of the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is not a shape that is recessed upward corresponding to the shape of the thin plate portion 242 in the left and right central portions as in the present embodiment, but is a substantially arc shape. When the design of the base plate 60 is changed so as to be formed, the center frame 86 can be assembled to the base plate 60 by changing the design corresponding to only the upper half (upper member 241), so that the lower half (lower side) is formed. As for the component member 261), a member designed in accordance with the present embodiment can be diverted.

As a result, it is necessary to newly manufacture a large mold that covers the entire center frame 86 for minor changes made by changing the design of the base plate 60 or changing the shape of the center frame 86 to change the appearance. Since there is no such thing, it is possible to reduce the mold cost.

The upper component 241 is a thin plate portion 242 arranged flush with the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and extends in a strip shape on the front side of the thin plate portion 242, and is made of glass during the game. A strip-shaped frame portion 245 formed with a size that does not allow the sphere to pass between the unit 16 (see FIG. 1) and that can guide the flow of the sphere, and arranged on the lower side and the left and right inside of the strip-shaped frame portion 245. It is provided with a decorative portion 247 that is provided and forms a substantially arc shape.

The thin plate portion 242 is used for positioning and fixing the extension portion 243 extending to the back side for reinforcement at the left and right and upper edge portions and the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23). A fixing portion 244 and a fixing portion 244 are provided.

The extension portion 243 is designed so that the front-rear width is about the same as the plate thickness of the base plate 60. That is, the front-rear thickness of the thin plate portion 242, which is shorter in front-rear width than the extension portion 243, is designed to be thinner than the plate thickness of the base plate 60. As a result, it is possible to easily secure a space on the back surface side of the thin plate portion 242.

The fixing portion 244 is disposed close to the recessed portion 244a recessed for positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) and the recessed portion 244a, and is projected to the front side. The projecting portion 244b and the fastening portion 244c into which the fastening screw inserted from the front side into the upper connecting member 271 is screwed are provided at symmetrical positions.

The thin plate portion 242 is arranged flush with the base plate 60, and the projecting portion 244b can be formed from an arbitrary position on the front side. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the positioning with the upper connecting member 270 (see FIGS. 22 and 23) can be improved. The assembly of the upper connecting member 270 using the fixing portion 244 will be described later.

A plurality of three-dimensional patterns and figures are formed in the decorative portion 247, and the decorative portion 247 is formed so as to have lower light transmission than the thin plate portion 242. As a result, the decorative portion 247 can be used as a portion that divides the field of view while leaving some light transmission.

Up to this point, the configuration on the front side of the upper component member 241 has been mainly described. Next, a configuration arranged on the back surface side of the upper component member 241 will be described. The upper component 241 includes an illuminated substrate 251 that is fastened and fixed to a fastening portion formed on the back surface side of the thin plate portion 242, and a substrate holding plate 252 that is fastened together with a fastening screw that fastens and fixes the illuminated board 251. , A dish-shaped member 253 sandwiched between the illuminated substrate 251 and the thin plate portion 242 and formed in a dish shape that expands toward the front side, and a decorative portion on one left and right side (right side in this embodiment) of the upper component member 241. It includes a sensor cover 254 that is fastened and fixed at a position on the back side of the 247.

The substrate holding plate 252 does not have a symmetrical shape, and the formation of the lower right portion is omitted as compared with the left portion. This makes it possible to facilitate the connection of the electrical wiring DH1 (see FIG. 19) passed from the sensor cover 254 side. That is, the connection terminal 251a of the illumination board 251 is arranged on the back surface of the lower right side of the board, and the shape of the board holding plate 252 is designed so that the electric wiring DH1 can be easily connected to this position. Has been done.

Further, the substrate holding plate 252 includes a recessed portion 252a that is concavely formed in a curved shape that is convex upward at the center position on the left and right. The recessed portion 252a is a portion formed for the purpose of improving the degree of freedom in arranging the operating unit 500, and the details will be described later.

The sensor cover 254 is fixed by arranging a capacitance sensor (for example, a sensor capable of detecting that a player holds his hand over the front side of the glass unit 16) inside and fixing the capacitance sensor. It is a member. In the present embodiment, it is used not only for fixing the capacitance sensor but also as a relay portion of the electric wiring DH1 connected to the illumination board 251.

That is, by fixing the electric wiring DH1 to the hook-shaped portion formed on the illuminated substrate 251 with a binding band or the like, the electric wiring DH1 can be held at the back position of the decorative portion 247. As a result, the electric wiring DH1 can be hidden so as not to be easily in the player's field of view. In this way, by holding the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1 by using the sensor cover 254, the assembly man-hours can be reduced and the assembly man-hours can be reduced as compared with the case of preparing a dedicated member for holding the arrangement of the electric wiring DH1. Material costs can be reduced.

The lower component 261 includes a thin plate portion 262 that is fastened and fixed to the front surface of the base plate 60 in the assembled state (see FIG. 18), and a strip-shaped extension portion 263 that extends from the thin plate portion 262 to the back side in a strip shape. And the back covering portion 264 that is fastened and fixed to the fastening portion formed at the extending end portion of the strip-shaped extending portion 263 and covers the back side of the strip-shaped extending portion 263, and the left and right of the thin plate portion 262. A pair of left and right flow path front component parts 265 that are fastened and fixed to the front side of the lower end portion to form a flow path for flowing the ball to the back side with the thin plate portion 262, and the back side of the left and right lower end portions of the thin plate portion 262 A pair of left and right flow paths that form a flow path that guides the sphere to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263 by being united with the semi-constituent portion that is fastened and fixed to and protrudes inward from the thin plate portion 262 of the flow path front configuration portion 265. A rear component 266 is provided.

The strip-shaped extending portion 263 includes an upper surface portion that is inclined downward toward the left and right central portions, and functions to return the rolled ball to the front side of the base plate 60. In the left and right central portions of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, there are a central rear inclined portion 263a that inclines downward to the back side so that a ball whose velocity in the left and right direction is settled can easily flow to the back side, and left and right sides of the central rear inclined portion 263a. A pair of left and right front inclined portions 263b, which are arranged slightly below the central rear inclined portion 263a and incline downward to the front side so that a ball whose velocity in the left-right direction is settled can easily flow to the front side, and a back surface by the central rear inclined portion 263a. The back covering portion 264 is provided with a ball discharge hole 263c formed so as to allow the ball guided to the front side to be discharged to the front side of the base plate 60 after being flowed down to the side.

In relation to the strip-shaped extension portion 263, the back cover portion 264 basically closes the strip-shaped extension portion 263 so as to prevent the ball from falling off from the back end portion, but is behind the central rear inclined portion 263a. Only in the case of, a gap is formed between the band-shaped extending portion 263 and the strip-shaped extending portion 263 so that the sphere can flow downward. A ball guided to the front side through this gap is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c.

Since the ball discharge hole 263c is arranged at the center position on the left and right, and the first winning opening 64 is arranged below it (see FIG. 18), the ball discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c has a high probability (nail). Enter the first winning opening 64 (with a higher probability than the ball approaching the first winning opening 64 while being played by KG1). Therefore, when the ball is guided to the strip-shaped extension portion 263, the attention to the ball can be improved.

The flow path front component 265 forms a guide path for guiding the sphere flowing down the front side of the thin plate portion 262 to the back side, and the flow path rear component 266 forms a rear end surface of the guide path to form a sphere. Is guided to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263. In other words, the flow path front component 265 and the flow path rear component 266 form a tunnel-shaped portion that discharges the sphere that has flowed in from the front side of the base plate 60 to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263.

A description will be given by returning to FIGS. 22 and 23. The upper connecting member 270 is a member formed of a light-transmitting resin material, and projects from the back side to the front side with the thin plate-shaped portion 271 and the plate-shaped portion 271 as the base end. The overhanging portion 272 to 277, the thin portion 278 formed partially thin on the back side of the plate-shaped portion 271, and the protruding portion 279 formed so as to project to the back side in the thin portion 278. , Equipped with.

The plate-shaped portion 271 is formed in a symmetrical bow shape that is long left and right when viewed from the front, and the shape of the lower edge portion is formed to follow the shape of the upper edge portion of the center frame 86. Further, the plate-shaped portion 271 has a curved upper edge portion, and more specifically, an outer rail in which a tangent line at a specific point of the upper edge portion of the plate-shaped portion 271 is arranged close to the specific point. The shape is parallel to the tangent of the corresponding point of 62.

The outer rail 62 and the plate-shaped portion 271 are spaced apart from each other by about the diameter of a ball (game ball) (see FIG. 18). As a result, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball rolling along the outer rail 62 collides with the plate-shaped portion 271 and the momentum is attenuated.

That is, the ball is configured to separate from the outer rail 62 before the ball introduced into the game area collides with the plate-shaped portion 271. In other words, as long as it is in contact with the outer rail 62, the sphere does not collide with the plate-shaped portion 271, so that the sphere to be launched with the maximum firing intensity (for example, the outer rail 62 until it collides with the return rubber 69). It is possible to prevent the ball that rolls in contact with the ball) from colliding with the plate-shaped portion 271 and dampening the momentum.

As a result, it is possible to avoid unnecessary attenuation of the sphere, and it is possible to prevent the plate-shaped portion 271 from being cracked or chipped due to the collision of the sphere with the maximum firing intensity with the plate-shaped portion 271.

The distance between the outer rail 62 and the plate-shaped portion 271 is not limited to the distance of about the diameter of the sphere, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, in consideration of the shape of the sphere, the distance may be changed in the front-rear direction (the distance becomes wider as the distance from the base plate 60 increases) so that the collision between the sphere and the plate-shaped portion 271 can be avoided. In this case, since the distance between the plate-shaped portion 271 and the outer rail 62 on the side close to the base plate 60 can be narrowed, when the plate-shaped portion 271 is decorated, the formation area of the decoration can be expanded. ..

The overhanging portions 272 to 277 have a symmetrical shape with respect to the left-right center of the plate-shaped portion 271 from a position symmetrical with respect to the left-right center of the plate-shaped portion 271 from the back side to the front surface of the plate-shaped portion 271. The parts that overhang toward the side, each of which replaces the function of the nail.

From the left and right center side, it is described as the first overhanging part 272, the second overhanging part 273, the third overhanging part 274, the fourth overhanging part 275, the fifth overhanging part 276, and the sixth overhanging part 277. To do.

The first overhanging portion 272 and the second overhanging portion 273 are arranged in front of the central constituent unit 240 via the thin plate member 290. The third overhanging portion 274 is arranged so as to straddle the central constituent unit 240 and the base plate 60. The fourth overhanging portion 275, the fifth overhanging portion 276, and the sixth overhanging portion 277 are arranged in front of the base plate 60.

As described above, since each of the overhanging portions 272 to 277 is arranged on the front side of which member, the function and the design concept may be different, but the details will be described later.

The thin portion 278 is a portion formed to be thin by shifting the back surface of the plate to the front side by the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290 or a dimension slightly exceeding the thickness dimension in order to arrange the thin plate member 290. In the present embodiment, the thin plate member 290 is held by the fixing portion 244 (see FIG. 22) instead of holding the thin plate member 290 by applying a pressing force from the thin portion 278 to the thin plate member 290. doing.

The deviation dimension of the thin portion 278 toward the front surface of the plate back surface is not limited to the case where the thin plate member 290 is formed with a thickness dimension of 290 or more, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the deviation of the back surface of the plate toward the front side may be designed to be less than the thickness dimension of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the thin plate member 290 is formed so as to be expandable and contractible (compressible) in the thickness direction, so that the arrangement of the thin plate member 290 can be easily fixed while avoiding excessive pressure being applied to the thin plate member 290. Can be done.

Further, for example, the deviation of the thin portion 278 to the front side of the plate back surface may be reduced only in the portion corresponding to the edge portion of the thin plate member 290. In this case, the range in which pressure is applied to the thin plate member 290 can be limited to the edge portion of the thin plate member 290.

The projecting portion 279 is a portion inserted into the positioning hole 291 formed in the thin plate member 290, and is a projecting portion for positioning the thin plate member 290. Since a recess (recess) corresponding to the shape of the overhanging portion 272, 273 is formed on the back side of the arrangement position of the first overhanging portion 272 or the second overhanging portion 273 in the thin portion 278, from this position It is not possible to project the projecting portion 279. That is, the projecting portion 279 is projected from a position in the thin portion 278 that avoids the arrangement of the first overhanging portion 272 and the second overhanging portion 273.

The thin plate member 290 is a member formed in a thin plate shape (sheet shape) from a light-transmitting resin material, and has a plurality of positioning holes 291 drilled for positioning at the time of assembly and an upper connecting member 270 at the center. It is provided with a plurality of insertion holes 292 that are formed as holes for inserting a fastening screw that is fastened and fixed to the configuration unit 240.

The positioning holes 291 are holes 291a that are bored on the left and right outside and through which the projecting portion 244b of the central configuration unit 240 is inserted, and holes 291b that are bored on the left and right inside and through which the projecting portion 279 of the upper connecting member 270 is inserted. , Equipped with. That is, the thin plate member 290 is used for positioning both the central constituent unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270.

In the present embodiment, the left and right outside means the left and right edge sides of the game board 13 or the operation unit 500 in the front view, and the left and right inside means the left and right center portions of the game board 13 or the operation unit 500 in the front view. means.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, the projecting portion 244b is formed at a position facing the recessed portion on the back surface side of the second overhanging portion 273. Therefore, in the front view, the projecting portion 244b is blindfolded by the second overhanging portion 273. As a result, the positioning (position stabilization) action of the thin plate member 290 can be caused by the projecting portion 244b while reducing the visibility of the projecting portion 244b.

As shown in FIGS. 22 and 23, by forming the portion formed in the upper connecting member 270 into the protruding portion 279 instead of the hole portion, positioning can be performed without any problem even in a narrow range of the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272 and 273. Part can be constructed. In other words, when forming a through hole or a recess in a narrow range, the wall thickness of the member may become excessively thin and the strength may be insufficient, but such a situation can be avoided.

In other words, it is possible to easily avoid that the arrangement of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 is restricted or the strength is lowered due to the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290. That is, when a hole for positioning is formed at the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272 and 273, the width length of the boundary position of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 is equal to or greater than the width length of the hole portion (the hole portion is a circle). If it is a shape, it is necessary to make it larger than the diameter), and there is a possibility that the strength of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 will be reduced by the amount that the material is scraped by the holes. It is possible to easily eliminate the points.

On the other hand, as described above, since the back surfaces of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 are recessed, the projecting portion 279 cannot be formed. Since it can be dealt with by projecting the projecting portion 244b, the positioning portion (protruding portion 244b, 279) of the thin plate member 290 can be arranged without being limited to the arrangement of the projecting portions 272 and 273. ..

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the projecting portions 244b and 279 for positioning the thin plate member 290 are formed on both the central configuration unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270, whereby the design of the upper connecting member 270 is free. Since it is possible to avoid being restricted in the arrangement of the positioning portion of the thin plate member 290 while maintaining a high degree of freedom and strength, the position of the thin plate member 290 can be stabilized.

Further, the protruding portion 279 inserted through the thin plate member 290 is designed so as to be able to be inserted into the recessed portion 244a of the central constituent unit 240, so that the thin plate member 290 can be inserted into the central constituent unit 240 and the upper connecting member 270. At the same time, the upper connecting member 270 can be positioned with respect to the central configuration unit 240.

The thin plate member 290 is a member that can be visually recognized by the player via the upper connecting member 270. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, patterns, figures, characters or characters are colorfully drawn on the front surface of the thin plate member 290, and the LED is illuminated from the LED arranged on the illuminated substrate 251 of the central configuration unit 240. Depending on the difference in the light emission mode (difference in color and light / dark mode), the color and light / dark mode visually recognized through the thin plate member 290 change in various ways.

Unlike the case where the pattern, graphic, character or character is drawn directly on the base plate 60, according to the present embodiment, if the thin plate member 290 is removed, the pattern, graphic, character or character drawn on the thin plate member 290 is drawn from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when the game board 13 has the same shape but the game playability is changed (so-called different specifications), the patterns, figures, characters or characters, colors, etc. drawn on the game board 13 are different. It may make it easier for the player to grasp the playability.

When a pattern, figure, character or character is drawn directly on the base plate 60, it is necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, so that it is easy to replace the entire game board 13 in substance, and the cost for changing the game playability is high. Easy to bulk.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 290 with another thin plate member 290 having a different pattern, figure, character or character, color, etc., so it is necessary to replace the entire game board 13. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the game playability.

26 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXVI of FIG. 18, FIG. 27 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in the line XXVII-XXVII of FIG. 26, and FIG. 28 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 of FIG. 26. It is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in -XXVIII line.

As shown in FIG. 26, the overhanging portions 272 to 277 are each formed in an individual shape, and when a ball introduced into the game area collides, the momentum of the ball is reduced while reducing the momentum of the ball. It has a common purpose of allowing the sphere to flow down to the left and right sides of the center frame 86.

Conventionally, overhanging portions 272 to 277 are formed as a substitute for nails that have been planted in the same arrangement. That is, each overhanging portion 272 to 277 is designed from a shape that surrounds a plurality of nails to be planted in a front view.

As can be seen in common with the first overhanging portion 272, the second overhanging portion 273, and the third overhanging portion 274, the upper side surface is formed wider than the other side surfaces. As a result, the ball can be configured to flow in the same direction along the inclination of the upper side surface regardless of the position on the upper side surface. As a result, even if the adjustment of the firing force is slightly deviated, the ball can be easily flowed down by a similar flow path, so that the stress during the game of the player who wants the ball to flow down by the same path can be alleviated.

Since the third overhanging portion 274 and the fourth overhanging portion 275 are arranged next to each other, even if the adjustment of the firing force of the sphere is slightly deviated, which one the sphere reaches will change. The slope of the upper side is very different. That is, the upper side surface of the third overhanging portion 274 is a downwardly inclined surface that gently inclines toward the left and right inward, whereas the upper side surface of the fourth overhanging portion 275 is steeply inclined toward the left and right inward. It is formed as a descending inclined surface.

Therefore, the ball that reaches the upper side surface of the fourth overhanging portion 275 and flows down will bounce greatly upward when it collides with the center frame 86, and the momentum is likely to be lost. Therefore, on the downstream side of the game area, it is easy to flow down toward the out opening 71 or toward the general winning opening 63 without reaching the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, the ball that reaches the upper side surface of the third overhanging portion 274 and flows down collides with the center frame 86 in the left-right direction, and the load in the bounce direction can also be used as the momentum of the flow down. It is easy to reach the first winning opening 64.

That is, the shape of the overhanging portion 272 to 276 is designed so that the flow mode of the ball on the downstream side of the game region changes depending on which overhanging portion 272 to 276 the ball reaches. This makes it possible for the player to enthusiastically adjust the firing force of the ball.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, a gap CL1 and CL2 of about the thickness of the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240 is provided between the base plate 60 and the extension portion 243 of the central configuration unit 240. Designed to be placed.

That is, it is not a design concept in which the central constituent unit 240 is positioned in the central opening 60b of the base plate 60, but a gap is left between the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 and the central constituent unit 240, and the upper connecting member 270 is provided. It is designed from the design concept that the central constituent unit 240 is simultaneously aligned with the base plate 60 at the time of fastening and fixing (connecting) by.

As shown in FIGS. 27 and 28, the thin plate member 290 and the central configuration unit 240 are arranged on the back surface of the first overhanging portion 272, while the base plate 60 is arranged on the back surface of the third overhanging portion 274. Is placed. As described above, the members arranged on the back surfaces of the overhanging portions 272 to 277 are not all the same and may be different.

As shown in FIG. 27, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240 is formed of a thin wall, for example, when a load is applied to the first overhanging portion 272, the first overhanging portion 272 is bent and deformed. In this case, since the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240 can also be bent and deformed, the load applied to the first overhanging portion 272 can be absorbed. Thereby, the possibility that the first overhanging portion 272 is cracked or chipped can be reduced.

Therefore, for example, when a sphere collides with the first overhanging portion 272, even if the momentum of the sphere is very large, the bending deformation of the first overhanging portion 272 and the thin plate portion caused by the bending deformation. Since the momentum of the ball can be sufficiently reduced by the bending deformation of the 242, the flow of the ball after colliding with the first overhanging portion 272 can be calmed down.

The bending deformation of the thin plate portion 242 is likely to occur by adopting a configuration in which gaps CL1 and CL2 are provided between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, instead of the configuration in which the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60 are fitted as described above. .. That is, in the present embodiment, by providing the gaps CL1 and CL2 between the thin plate portion 242 and the base plate 60, the central constituent unit 240 is flexed and deformed, so that the load applied to the first overhanging portion 272 is released. be able to.

A similar effect can be expected for the second overhanging portion 273. The load given to the first overhanging portion 272 includes a load due to a collision of a game ball, a load applied by a clerk of a game machine store when clearing a ball clogging in a game area, and a worker performing maintenance work. The load applied from is assumed.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 28, the base plate 60 is formed so thick that no bending occurs. Therefore, for example, when a load is applied to the third overhanging portion 274, the base plate 60 bends. Although it cannot be expected that the load is released by the deformation, the height position of the third overhanging portion 274 is lower than that of the overhanging portions 272 and 273, so that the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small. Therefore, even if the third overhanging portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60, the possibility that the third overhanging portion 274 is cracked or chipped can be reduced.

Furthermore, in consideration of the fact that if the momentum of the ball colliding with the third overhanging portion 274 is excessively reduced at a place where the momentum of the colliding ball is relatively small, the flow of the ball may stop. In the embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the third overhanging portion 274 is arranged in front of the base plate 60.

Further, since the bending of the third overhanging portion 274 is suppressed and the state is stable, the center frame 86 is distributed to the left and right sides of the center frame 86 and is used as a game area where nails are planted. Since the guidance of the sphere can be stabilized in the arrangement close to the left right region and the lower region, the correspondence between the firing intensity of the sphere and the flow mode of the sphere can be stabilized.

In order to prevent the third overhanging portion 274 from cracking or chipping, the collision angle with the sphere, the shape of the third overhanging portion 274, and the like are given to the third overhanging portion 274. It is preferable to design so that the load is small (the load can easily escape). It is preferable that the same design concept is adopted for the fourth overhanging portion 275 to the sixth overhanging portion 277.

The advantages of using the overhanging portions 272 to 277 as a substitute for the nail KG1 planted on the base plate 60 will be described. In particular, it is possible to improve the effect of production. That is, in the case of the overhanging portions 272 to 277 formed from the light-transmitting resin material, there are few blindfolded portions for the player as compared with the metal nail KG1.

For example, even in the configuration in which the illumination substrate 251 and the thin plate member 290 are arranged on the back side of the overhanging portions 272 and 273 as in the present embodiment (see FIG. 27), the overhanging portions 272 and 273 emit light. Since it is transmitted, the light emitted from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the illumination substrate 251 and the pattern, the figure, the character or the character drawn on the thin plate member 290 should be easily visible to the player. Can be done.

The illumination substrate 251 includes a central light emitting means 251b composed of four LEDs arranged at the center position of the lower side, and seven arranged so as to surround the left and right sides and the upper side of the central light emitting means 251b. It is provided with ambient light emitting means 251c composed of LEDs and distant light emitting means 251d composed of two LEDs arranged near both left and right ends, and the arrangement in the present embodiment is a hidden line in FIG. 26. Illuminated. The light emitting means 251b, 251c, and 251d do not necessarily have the same light irradiation direction, and the objects to be illuminated are different.

The central light emitting means 251b illuminates the symbol mark (shown in white in FIG. 26) in the left and right central portions of the decorative portion 247 of the central configuration unit 240 in the light irradiation direction in the front direction (the optical axis is in the front-rear direction). In order to make the entire symbol mark emit light lightly, the width angle in the irradiation direction with respect to the optical axis of the light emitted from the central light emitting means 251b is designed to be large.

The ambient light emitting means 251c emits light to a portion having a width in the front-rear direction, such as a band-shaped frame portion 245 and an edge portion of an overhanging portion 272, 273, in which the light irradiation direction is the front direction (the optical axis is the front-rear direction). It is arranged to be introduced. The optical axis of the light emitted from the ambient light emitting means 251c is used as a reference in order to collect the energy of the light on the optical axis so that the light visually recognized by the player after passing through the long portion in the front-rear direction is not weakened. The width angle in the irradiation direction is designed to be small.

As a result, the path of light (the path of light passing through the strip-shaped frame portion 245 and the overhanging portions 272 and 273) is directly conspicuous depending on how the light is brightened and darkened and the color is changed, and there is a difference in the conspicuous method. It is possible to perform a production that puts on. For example, by making a difference in the brightness of the light on the left and right, it is possible to execute a light emission effect that implicitly suggests the direction in which the sphere is launched.

For example, the LED of the ambient light emitting means 251c arranged behind the lower edge portion 272a of the first overhanging portion 272 guides light from the lower edge portion 272a of the first overhanging portion 272 to the left and right outer edge portions 272b. It is arranged to shine. As a result, the player can easily reach the left and right outer edge portions 272b of the first overhanging portion 272 by firing the ball with the light of the first overhanging portion 272 as a mark. The optical axis of the light passes through a position where the front-rear width of the first overhanging portion 272 is long, so that the light can be easily totally reflected inside the first overhanging portion 272.

Further, since the internal shape of the first overhanging portion 272 is curved so that the rear portion protrudes inward, the light traveling inside the first overhanging portion 272 is directed to the first overhanging portion 272. It can be repeatedly reflected inside to facilitate the collection of light inside the first overhanging portion 272. As a result, the first overhanging portion 272 can be made to emit light brighter than the surroundings in the front view.

As shown in FIG. 27, the illumination substrate 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240. In the present embodiment, on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270 in the range where the sphere is guided on the front side, within the thickness dimension (front-back direction) of the thick portion (thick portion required for driving the nail KG1) of the base plate 60. The illumination board 251 is arranged (within the dimensions). That is, the front-rear position of the illuminated substrate 251 is set to the front side rather than the front-rear position of the back side surface of the thick portion of the base plate 60.

This is an impossible substrate arrangement in the range in which the nail KG1 as a component for guiding the ball is driven into the base plate 60. In other words, in the range where the nail KG1 is driven, the base plate 60 must be formed to be sufficiently thick, so that it is within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60 (front and back of the back side surface of the thick portion of the base plate 60). It is not possible to secure a space for arranging the illumination board 251 (on the front side of the position).

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as a part for guiding the sphere, a thin-walled upper connecting member 270 is adopted instead of the nail KG1, and the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 is arranged on the back surface of the base plate 60. Instead, by arranging the thin plate portion 242 of the central configuration unit 240, a space for arranging the illumination substrate 251 is secured on the back side of the range where the sphere is guided.

As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement of the illumination board 251 can be improved as compared with the case where the illumination board 251 has to be arranged on the back side of the base plate 60, and the illumination board 251 can be arranged. The arrangement can be moved to the front side.

By moving the illumination board 251 toward the front side, it is possible to facilitate the arrangement of the rotation effect device 800 (see FIG. 17) of the operation unit 500 arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and also to move the electric decoration board 251 toward the front side. Since the central light emitting means 251b and the ambient light emitting means 251c arranged on the decorative substrate 251 and the light source arranged on the rotation effect device 800 are arranged on the front side, the light to be visually recognized by the player is made brighter. can do.

The distant light emitting means 251d is a direction in which the light irradiation direction (optical axis direction) intersects the front-rear direction (the direction shown by the arrow in FIG. 26), and the overhanging portions 274 to 276 arranged on the left and right outer sides and the like. , The strip-shaped frame portion 245, the outer rail 62, and the like are arranged so as to irradiate light.

As a result, even in the configuration as in the present embodiment in which a plate-thick portion of the base plate 60 is formed to ensure strength and the overhanging portions 274 to 276 are arranged in front of the plate-thick portion, far-distance light emission is performed. The overhanging portions 274 to 276 can be sufficiently illuminated by utilizing the light irradiation from the means 251d.

In particular, in the present embodiment, since the illuminated substrate 251 is closer to the front end side of the base plate 60 than the rear end of the plate thickness (arranged within the plate thickness dimension), it is front and rear from the distant light emitting means 251d. It is possible to make it easier for the light emitted in the direction intersecting the direction to reach the fifth overhanging portion 276 separated from the left and right outside.

The shapes of the overhanging portions 274 to 276 that receive the light from the distant light emitting means 251d are devised so that the amount of light can be easily secured. That is, for example, in the third overhanging portion 274, the side surface 274a (left and right inner and upper side surfaces) on the distant light emitting means 251d side is widely formed, and is formed so as to receive the light from the distant light emitting means 251d on the surface. ..

Further, on the opposite side (left and right outer side and lower side) of the distant light emitting means 251d, a corner portion 274b is formed at a connecting position between the surfaces, and a cut formed on the overhanging portion 274 is applied to the corner portion 274b. It is formed from a shape that concentrates the light. As a result, the light emission intensity can be ensured even at the corner portion 274b away from the distant light emitting means 251d.

Regarding the light irradiation to the 6th overhanging portion 277, the thin plate portion 242 (not the center of the left and right but the left and right) arranged on the left and right inside of the 6th overhanging portion 277 is not the light irradiation from the illuminated substrate 251. The light transmitted through the outer thin plate portion 242) to the front side is used.

Further, the light emitting effect of the sixth overhanging portion 277 is also executed by the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800, which will be described later, but the light emitted from the rotating member 810 is directed toward the front side. The configuration and its strength setting will be described later.

It will be described back to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20, the winning openings 63, 64 and the like arranged below the center frame 86 are formed as a part of the winning opening constituent member 400 formed of a light-transmitting resin material.

FIG. 29 is an exploded front perspective view of the game board 13, and FIG. 30 is an exploded rear perspective view of the game board 13. 29 and 30 show a state in which the winning opening component 400 is disassembled.

The winning opening component 400 is a central component 410 that is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 at the left and right central portions of the game board 13, and an lining member 430 that covers the lower portion of the central component 410 from the front side. The left component 450 arranged on the left side of the central component 410 and fastened and fixed to the base plate 60, and the right component 470 arranged on the right side of the central component 410 and fastened and fixed to the base plate 60. To be equipped. The right portion component 470 is formed in a substantially symmetrical shape with the left component member 450.

The central constituent member 410 includes a flat plate-shaped main body plate portion 411 that is fastened and fixed in contact with the base plate 60 in a surface contact, a horizontally long opening 412 formed as an opening constituting the specific winning opening 65a, and a horizontally long opening thereof. A pair of left and right distribution portions 413 that are formed so as to be able to distribute the flow path of the sphere above the left and right sides of the 412, and an upper side surface is formed in a curved plate shape above the distribution portion 413. A pair of left and right curved protrusions 414 that project to the front side so that the flow path of the ball can be distributed, and a size that allows the ball to be discharged to a position separated from the left and right ends of the horizontally long opening 412 to the left and right. It is provided with a pair of left and right out ports 415 to be drilled.

The main body plate portion 411 includes sheet disposing recesses 411a that are recessed from the back surface side on both the left and right sides so as to reduce the plate thickness. The sheet arranging recess 411a is recessed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the effect sheet member (thin plate member 380), and is formed at a recessing depth substantially equal to the thickness of the sheet member.

The gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved projecting portion 414 is formed to be larger than the diameter of the sphere. As a result, the sphere can flow down through the gap between the distribution portion 413 and the curved projecting portion 414, so that the randomness of the flow of the sphere can be enhanced and the attention to the sphere can be improved. Can be done.

The distribution portion 413 includes a plurality of ridge portions 413a projecting from the left and right inner side (second winning opening 140 side) side surfaces. The ridge portion 413a is a shape portion provided to reduce the flow speed of the sphere by abutting against the flowing sphere, and due to the deceleration effect of the ridge portion 413a, the opening / closing plate 65b of the specific winning opening 65a is formed from the ridge. The given collision force can be reduced. This makes it possible to prevent the opening / closing plate 65b from being damaged.

The tangent line HL1 (see FIG. 31) of the curved surface passing through the lower end of the curved surface of the curved projecting portion 414 is designed to pass through the left and right inner side surfaces (side surface on the first winning opening 64 side) of the distribution portion 413. ing. Therefore, a sphere that has rolled the curved surface of the curved projecting portion 414 to the lower end portion tends to reach the left and right inner side surfaces of the distribution portion 413.

The lining member 430 has a main body plate portion 431 formed of a light-transmitting resin material and formed in a thin plate shape, and a strip-shaped back surface extending from the left and right side ends of the main body plate portion 431 toward the left and right inner portions. A pair of left and right strip-shaped portions 432 extending to the side and a pair of left and right vertical plate portions extending to the back side in a vertically long plate shape while being connected to the left and right inner ends of the strip-shaped portion 432. The rotation of the 433, the pair of left and right inclined plate portions 434 extending to the back side in the shape of a long plate having a posture of ascending and inclining from the upper end portion of the vertical plate portion 433 toward the left and right inward, and the electric accessory 140a. An upright portion 435 formed upright on the back side from the main body plate portion 431 is provided on the lower side of the electric accessory 140a so as to regulate the angle.

The strip-shaped portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the erecting portion 435 have the tip portion of the main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410 in a state where the lining member 430 is fastened and fixed to the central constituent member 410. It is formed with a length that allows it to come into contact with. That is, the flow path of the sphere is changed by the strip-shaped portion 432, the vertical plate portion 433, the inclined plate portion 434, and the erection portion 435, and the flow path of the sphere is distributed.

The band-shaped portion 432 is arranged along the left-right outer side and the lower side of the out port 415, and the ball that rolls and flows down to the band-shaped portion 432 is guided by the out port 415 and discharged from the game area.

The inclined plate portion 434 is arranged on the specific winning opening 65a side of the out opening 415, but since the inclined direction of the upper side surface is the direction of downward inclination toward the out opening 415 side, the inclined plate portion 434 rolls down to the inclined plate portion 434. The ball is also guided to the out port 415 and discharged from the game area.

The erection portion 435 is arranged on the left and right inside of the distribution portion 413 of the central constituent member 410 in the assembled state (see FIG. 17) of the central constituent member 410 and the lining member 430 with a gap equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere. To. As a result, the ball can flow down between the distribution unit 413 and the erection unit 435.

The left component 450 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material, and has a flat plate-shaped main body plate 451 that is fastened and fixed in contact with the base plate 60 in a surface contact state, and a wide front surface of the left portion of the main body plate 451. It is a plate-shaped part in which the left end is arranged with a gap large enough for a ball to pass between the overhanging portion 453 formed overhanging to the side and the overhanging portion 453. A ceiling plate portion 455 formed from a downwardly inclined shape, and a plurality of ball guide portions 457 and 459 formed in a shape capable of guiding a ball to the general winning opening 63 below the ceiling plate portion 455. Be prepared.

The ceiling plate portion 455 is not divided in the middle so that only the balls that have passed through the gap between the overhanging portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 can flow down the ball guide portions 457 and 459. It is formed in a plate shape.

Sheet disposing recesses 451b and 471b, which are recessed from the back surface side so as to reduce the plate thickness, are formed on the back surface side of the left component member 450 and the back surface side of the right component member 470. The sheet arranging recesses 451b and 471b are recessed in a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the sheet member (not shown) for effect, and are formed with a recessed depth substantially equal to the thickness of the sheet member. In addition, the example of the decoration of this sheet member is substituted by the description in the thin plate member 380.

FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXXI of FIG. The sphere that does not pass through the gap between the overhanging portion 453 and the ceiling plate portion 455 and rolls down on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is not guided to the guide portions 457 and 459, and has a central configuration. It flows down so as to be guided to the member 410 side. The flow path of the sphere from the upstream side of the left component member 450 and the central component member 410 will be described.

As shown in FIG. 31, the plurality of nails KG1 planted on the base plate 60 are arranged on the left and right with a gap smaller than the diameter of the sphere along a straight line that inclines downward toward the inside in the left-right direction. While the path of the sphere (main path FL1) that flows down toward the center is formed, there are gaps that exceed the diameter of the sphere in some places, so that the sphere's dropout path that passes through the gap and deviates from the main path. FL2 and FL3 are formed.

The ceiling plate portion 455 is formed so that the sphere can roll on the upper surface, but the rolling speed of the sphere rolling on the ceiling plate portion 455 differs depending on the timing of falling down from the main path FL1. More specifically, when the path of the sphere changes from the main path FL1 to the dropout path FL2, the flow velocity of the sphere is switched from a state in which the sphere is mainly oriented in the left-right direction to a state in which the sphere is mainly oriented in the vertical direction.

Then, after reaching the ceiling plate portion 455, the speed is switched to the state in which the velocity faces the left-right direction again. Therefore, the earlier the timing at which the ball reaches the ceiling plate portion 455 (the upstream side of the flow path), the more the ceiling plate The rolling speed (momentum) of the ball when flowing down the portion 455 increases, and it is easy to reach the left and right inside (specific winning opening 65a side) of the game area.

Further, since the left and right inner end portions (lower end portions) of the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 are arranged above the upper end portions of the adjacent curved projecting portions 414, the ceiling plate portion 455 is rolled to the left and right. It is easy to prevent the ball passing inward from being dammed by the left and right outer side surfaces of the curved projecting portion 414.

When the rolling speed of the ball when flowing down the ceiling plate portion 455 is increased and the specific winning opening 65a is reached at that speed, the opening / closing plate 65b is damaged due to a large impact force being transmitted from the ball to the opening / closing plate 65b. Although there is a concern, in the present embodiment, the ridge portion 413a is arranged in the flow path of the ball to the opening / closing plate 65b, and the flow speed of the ball is reduced.

In addition, standing portions 435 are arranged to face each other on the left and right inside of the ridge portion 413a to prevent a plurality of balls from flowing down side by side. As a result, it is possible to avoid the occurrence of ball clogging between the ridge portion 413a and the upright portion 435 (rectifying action), and it is easy to avoid the occurrence of a situation in which the ball lands on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the opening / closing plate 65b from being damaged (improved durability).

In this way, the flow path of the sphere is restricted while the flow velocity of the sphere is reduced. As a result, the collision force generated when the ball collides with the opening / closing plate 65b can be reduced, so that the occurrence of a problem that the opening / closing plate 65b is damaged can be suppressed.

In the present embodiment, since the ridges 413a are arranged symmetrically with respect to the erection 435, in the pair of flow paths formed by the pair of left and right ridges 413a and the erection 435. When the balls flow down at the same time, it is possible that a plurality of balls land on the opening / closing plate 65b at the same time.

Therefore, in the special game state, by striking the balls to the left and right, it is possible to facilitate the simultaneous entry of a plurality of balls into the specific winning opening 65a. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the progress of the special gaming state becomes too slow.

Since the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed as a wide inclined surface to the left and right, a plurality of spheres can be received at the same time by the ceiling plate portion 455, and the spheres are vigorously arranged on the left and right inside (specific). It can be sent to the winning opening 65a side).

Then, the spheres flowed inwardly pass through the left and right inside of the distribution portion 413 (the side on which the ridge portion 413a is formed) in order, and reach the open / close plate 65b in order. As described above, according to the present embodiment, the paths of the spheres reaching the opening / closing plate 65b are grouped into the paths passing through the left and right inside of the distribution portion 413, so that the spheres collide with each other on the upstream side of the opening / closing plate 65b. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball deviates from the specific winning opening 65a.

Furthermore, the position where it reaches the closing plate 65b flows down while in contact with the ridges 413a of the sorting unit 413, by the left and right ends of the particular winning holes 65a and closing plate 65b is designed to be located on the left and right outer side Even when the balls collide with each other on the opening / closing plate 65b and bounce to the left or right, the state in which the balls are on the upper surface of the opening / closing plate 65b can still be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball spills from the opening / closing plate 65b.

Even when a plurality of balls are densely retained from the left and right ends of the opening / closing plate 65b, a space is formed below the inclined plate portion 434 in the present embodiment, and the balls are placed on the left and right outside of the opening / closing plate 65b. It is possible to avoid a situation in which the path of the sphere passing through the left and right inside of the distribution unit 413 is clogged.

In the present embodiment, by arranging a gap exceeding the diameter of the sphere between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved projecting portion 414, the flow of the sphere through the gap is allowed. For example, when a sphere that rolls down the ceiling plate portion 455 collides with a sphere that rolls down through the inner drop path FL3, the ball that has rolled down the ceiling plate portion 455 is slowed down in the left-right direction, and the ceiling plate portion 455. It is easy to enter the gap between the curved protrusion 414 and the curved protrusion 414.

The frequency with which the sphere flowing down the main path FL1 flows down with the outer dropout path FL2 and the frequency with which it flows down with the inner dropout path FL3 may change depending on the state of the nail KG1 (dirt adhesion, production lot). Therefore, without countermeasures, the game efficiency and game profit are affected by the state of the nail KG1, and it is not possible to provide the game under equal conditions.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, when a ball that rolls on the ceiling plate portion 455 through the outer drop path FL2 occurs more frequently than a ball that flows down on the inner drop path FL3, up to the first winning opening 64. Since the number of balls that reach is reduced, it is disadvantageous in the game state (normal state, time saving state, high probability state, etc.) aiming for a big hit by receiving a lottery, but in the big hit game state where the specific winning opening 65a opens and closes, the ceiling plate The possibility that a ball will enter the gap between the portion 455 and the curved projecting portion 414 can be reduced, and most of the balls that have reached the ceiling plate portion 455 can be guided to the specific winning opening 65a, thus improving the game efficiency. It can be improved (for example, the time required for the jackpot game can be shortened).

On the other hand, if the balls flowing down the inner dropout path FL3 occur more frequently than the balls rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 through the outer dropout path FL2, more balls reach the first winning opening 64. , It is advantageous in the game state (normal state, time saving state, high probability state, etc.) aiming for a big hit by receiving a lottery, but in the big hit game state where the specific winning opening 65a opens and closes, the ceiling plate portion 455 is rolled. A ball that has flowed downward from the inner drop path FL3 collides with the path of the ball that flows down, and the ball falls into the gap between the ceiling plate portion 455 and the curved protrusion portion 414, or the distribution portion 413 and the curved protrusion. Balls that pass through the gap between the ceiling and the ceiling 414 and flow toward the out port 415 frequently occur. As a result, the number of balls deviating from the specific winning opening 65a increases, so that the game efficiency of the jackpot game decreases.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the magnitude relationship between the frequency of occurrence of balls rolling down the ceiling plate portion 455 through the outer dropout path FL2 and the frequency of occurrence of balls flowing down the inner dropout path FL3 is switched, the game state is set. It is designed so that the advantageous state and the disadvantageous state are switched, and the player is not unilaterally advantageous or unilaterally disadvantageous.

That is, while allowing different states of the nail KG1, regardless of the state of the nail KG1, the relationship is maintained to be advantageous to the player in a certain state and disadvantageous to the player in another state. By doing so, we are trying to provide games under equal conditions.

On the left and right inside of the extension plate portion 455a which flows down along the outer dropout path FL2 and extends upward at the left end portion of the ceiling plate portion 455 and the overhanging portion 453 which is arranged to face the extension plate portion 455a. The flow path of the sphere flowing down between the side wall portion 453a formed to be curved toward the lower left and right sides will be described.

The rate at which the ball is guided to this flow path varies depending on the state of the adjacent nails KG2 (interval at the position where the ball flows down). The state of the nail KG2 may change due to a collision of a ball, a clerk of a game machine store, or the like.

Further, the ratio of whether the ball reaches immediately before the nail KG2 varies depending on whether the ball rolls on the upper surface of the side wall portion 453. Whether or not the sphere reaches the upper surface of the side wall portion 453 depends on the state of the wind turbine FS1 arranged above the side wall portion 453. Since the rotating shaft of the wind turbine FS1 is driven into the base plate 60 like the nail KG2, the state of the wind turbine FS1 may change due to a collision of a ball, a clerk of a game machine store, or the like.

Since the first ball guide portion 457 is arranged directly below the flow path between the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, the flowed ball normally passes through the first ball guide portion 457 and is in the game area. Is discharged from. The first ball guide unit 457 constitutes a general winning opening 63, and when the ball is guided to the first ball guide unit 457, the prize ball is paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, when a ball flows directly below between the extension plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a, the ball enters the first ball guide portion 457 with a probability of 80% and has a probability of 10%. It is configured so that it deviates to the left with a probability of 10%. It should be noted that this ratio can be designed to be different depending on the shapes (inclination, spacing, etc.) of the extending plate portion 455a and the side wall portion 453a and the arrangement of the first ball guide portion 457.

On the other hand, for example, when the next ball reaches the first ball guide portion 457 while the ball that has reached the first ball guide portion 457 is still staying at the first ball guide portion 457, the following The ball deviates to the left and right of the first ball guide portion 457 and easily flows down. Further, for example, when a plurality of balls flow toward the first ball guide portion 457 in a gathered state, some of the plurality of balls deviate to the left and right of the first ball guide portion 457 and easily flow down.

When the ball guide portion 457 deviates to the left and right outside, the winning opening is not arranged on the downstream side thereof, and the ball is discharged from the out opening 415. On the other hand, when the ball guide portion 457 deviates from the first ball guide portion 457 to the left and right inward, the inclined guide portion 458 projecting from the first ball guide portion 457 to the left and right inward can be rolled to reach the second ball guide portion 459. The second ball guide unit 459 constitutes the general winning opening 63, and when the ball is guided to the second ball guide unit 459, the prize ball is paid out to the player.

The number of prize balls paid out when the ball is guided to the first ball guide unit 457 and the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is guided to the second ball guide unit 459 are arbitrarily set. Although it is possible, in the present embodiment, the number of prize balls to be paid out is set to be larger when the balls are guided to the downstream side.

That is, the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is guided to the second ball guide unit 459 is larger than the number of prize balls paid out when the ball is guided to the first ball guide unit 457. It is set to increase.

As a result, when a ball flows down to the left side of the left end of the ceiling slope portion 455, the ball does not enter the first ball guide portion 457 but deviates to the right side (second ball guide portion 459 side). It is possible to create the playability desired by a person and improve the attention to the left component 450.

For example, when one prize ball is set to be paid out as the ball is guided to the first guide unit 457, the ball toward the first guide unit 457 is on the left and right outside (left side in FIG. 31). The number of balls held by the player decreases when the player deviates to, and the number of balls is maintained as it is (1 prize ball for 1 shot) when guided by the 1st guide unit 457, and deviates to the left and right inside (right side in FIG. 31). The number of balls on hand may increase by guiding the balls to the second ball guide unit 459 and paying out prize balls (more than one, generally 2 to 15). Playability can be configured.

As a result, the flow of the ball near the first guide portion 457 can be easily associated with the magnitude of the profit obtained by the player, so that the attention to the flow of the ball near the first guide portion 457 can be improved. Can be done.

Since the inclined guide portion 458 extending to the right of the first guide portion 457 is made of a resin material, it easily breaks when bent or the like. Therefore, unlike the nail KG1, it is easy to grasp the change in the state. If the broken state can be grasped, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering an unexpected disadvantage by stopping the operation of the pachinko machine 10 until the member is replaced.

In the present embodiment, various shapes have been devised so that the ball that has rolled the tilt guide portion 458 is guided to the second ball guide portion 459 with a high probability. First, a bulging portion 456 that bulges on the lower surface side of the ceiling plate portion 455 is formed at the upper left position of the second ball guide portion 459.

The ball that starts rolling on the upper surface of the tilt guide portion 458 and whose vertical bounce is not sufficiently contained comes into contact with the bulging portion 456 in the left-right direction, and the velocity direction of the ball is changed downward. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the inclined guide portion 458 from deviating to the right side of the second ball guide portion 459 with the momentum.

Secondly, the horizontal distance between the inclined guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459 is shorter than the radius of the sphere, and the vertical distance between the tilt guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459 is a sphere. It projects toward the second ball guide portion 459 to a position shorter than the diameter of the (tilt guide portion 458) and is formed in a dimensional relationship that does not allow the passage of a ball between the tilt guide portion 458 and the second ball guide portion 459. ) Therefore, the tilt guide portion 458 can easily prevent the ball from deviating to the left side of the second ball guide portion 459.

Since the winning opening component 400 is a resin molded member and is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 with a fastening screw, replacement when a defect occurs is easier than when replacing (re-strike) the nail KG1. Is.

For example, if the nail KG1 breaks, there is a high possibility that the operation of the game machine will be stopped for a long period of time. Normally, the nail KG1 is not driven individually, but a large number of nails KG1. It is not easy to re-drive the nail KG1 just because a part of the nail KG1 is broken because the nail KG1 is driven by an automatic machine.

Therefore, it is often necessary to replace the entire game board for repair, but if it is judged that the replacement cost cannot be covered, even though there is no faulty part other than the nail KG1. There is a possibility that it will be stored in the warehouse without restarting. That is, there was room for improvement from the viewpoint of maintainability and improvement of the operating period of the game machine.

In the present embodiment, in order to prevent the nail KG1 from being defective as much as possible, the ball falling in the vertical direction is received by the overhanging portion 453 of the left component 450, and the received ball is received by the overhanging portion. By rolling left and right on the upper surface of 453, the momentum in the vertical direction is reduced, and then the nail KG1 on the downstream side thereof is brought into contact with the nail KG1. As a result, the load applied from the ball to the nail KG1 can be reduced, and the occurrence of defects in the nail KG1 can be suppressed.

Further, focusing on the nails KG1 arranged on the left and right outer sides of the outer dropout path FL2, since the left and right outer sides are covered with the overhanging portion 453, the ball does not collide with these nails KG1 from the left and right outer sides. Therefore, the period until the nail KG1 breaks can be lengthened as compared with the case where the nail KG1 receives a load from a random direction.

The ball that has flowed down the front side of the left component 450 passes through the out port 415 and is discharged to the back side of the base plate 60. At this time, since the passage of the ball to the left and right inside (the side close to the opening / closing plate 65b) is restricted by the vertical plate portion 433, the ball flows to the opening / closing plate 65b side without passing through the out port 415. Can be prevented.

Therefore, the rotating shaft of the opening / closing plate 65b can prevent the ball from flowing in from the left component 450 side, so that the ball can always pass between the opening / closing plate 65b and the inner rail 61 as a countermeasure against ball clogging. The vertical distance between the inner rail 61 and the rotation shaft (lower edge portion) of the opening / closing plate 65b can be set to be less than the diameter of the sphere.

Even with such a configuration, if the ball on the opening / closing plate 65b spills to the left or right, it can be temporarily placed between the vertical plate portion 433 and the opening / closing plate 65b, and the opening / closing plate 65b can be placed. In the closed state, the opening / closing plate 65b blocking the flow path of the ball retracts from the flow path of the ball, so that the temporarily placed ball flows down toward the out port 71. Therefore, the possibility of ball clogging can be reduced.

FIG. 32 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 in line XXXII-XXXII of FIG. The main body plate portion 451 of the left component member 450 extends from the left and right inner edge portions along the front surface of the base plate 60 in a thin plate shape (a plate shape thinner than the thickness of the main body plate portion 451). The main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410 includes a concealed extension portion 411b extending from the left and right outer edge portions along the front side side surface.

In the present embodiment, the extension portion 451a is sandwiched between the lining extension portion 411b and the base plate 60. As a result, the fastening screw for fixing can be removed from the left and right inner ends of the left component 450 on the sandwiched side, so that the fastening screw is present when the left component 450 is decorated accordingly. It is possible to make it easier not to cause a problem that the effect of the effect is lowered due to the fact that the screw is conspicuous. In addition, since the number of fastening screws for fastening and fixing the members can be reduced, the man-hours for assembly and the material cost can be reduced.

The front-rear position of the front end portion of the overturned extension portion 411b in the state where the extension portion 451a is sandwiched between the extension portion 451a and the base plate 60 is located on the back side of the front-rear position of the front end portion of the main body plate portion 451. There is. As a result, when the sphere flowing down the front side of the main body plate portion 451 flows toward the front side of the main body plate portion 411, the front end portion of the overhanging extension portion 411b and the sphere collide with each other, and the sphere is left and right outside. It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is bounced off.

FIG. 33 is an exploded front perspective view of the distribution unit 300, and FIG. 34 is an exploded rear perspective view of the distribution unit 300. As shown in FIGS. 33 and 34, the above-mentioned distribution unit 983 is arranged in a rotatable state inside the distribution unit 300, and passes through the first winning opening 64 to enter the distribution unit 300. It is configured so that the balls guided by the ball are alternately distributed to the left and right.

The distribution unit 300 is a member arranged so that the distribution unit 983 can rotate from the back side, and has a first configuration that constitutes a flow path for distributing balls that have passed through the first winning opening 64 to the left and right and flowing them down. Along with supporting the member 310, the ceiling component 330 that constitutes the ceiling of the path through which the ball passing through the first winning opening 64 flows backward, and the shaft member 988a of the distribution portion 983 together with the first component 310, both holdings are supported. A first auxiliary member 340 that regulates the falling of a ball that abuts on the distribution portion 983 and flows to the back surface side, and a second component member that constitutes a discharge path for the ball discharged from the downstream side to the rear of the first component member 310. The 350 and its second constituent member 350 are fastened and fixed so as to cover the rear and upper sides of the discharge path formed by the second constituent member 350 and fastened and fixed to the first constituent member 310. A pair of left and right second auxiliary members 370 and a pair of left and right thin plate members 380 arranged on the front side of the first constituent member 310 and between the first constituent member 310 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410. And.

The first component 310 is a plate-shaped central plate portion 311 formed of a colorless translucent resin material and formed along a plane orthogonal to the front-rear direction, and extends from the upper end of the central plate portion 311 to the front side. An extension plate portion 313 to be provided, a pair of inclined extension portions 315 extending on the back side of the central plate portion 311 and extending in a strip shape in a direction of downward inclination toward the left and right outside, and an inclined extension portion 315 thereof. A pair of direction switching portions 317 that are connected to the left and right outer ends to switch the flow direction of the ball (in this embodiment, the ball is switched 90 degrees from the left-right direction to the front-back direction) and a size that allows the ball to pass on the front side of the central plate portion 311. A pair of left and right opening forming portions 320, in which a plurality of left and right openings are arranged side by side, are provided.

The central plate portion 311 includes a substantially cylindrical bearing portion 312 into which one end of the shaft member 988a that pivotally supports the distribution portion 983 is inserted just below the rear end portion of the extension plate portion 313. The bearing portion 312 is formed to have an inner diameter larger than the outer diameter of the shaft member 988a.

The extension plate portion 313 is formed as a ridge portion that is formed as a ridge that inclines downward toward the rear toward the upper end surface along the left and right central portions, and a ridge portion 313a that forms a rolling path of the ball, and a sphere that is erected from the left and right edges. A pair of left and right wall-shaped portions 314 for guiding the rearward are provided.

The ball flowing down the inclined extension portion 315 flows down to the left and right outside while being restricted from falling off to the back side by the front plate portion 371 of the second auxiliary member 370. The second auxiliary member 370 is also used as a member for preventing the detection device SE3 from coming off.

The direction switching portion 317 is formed as a plate surface on which the ball can roll at a position one step lower than the inclined extension portion 315 on the left and right outer sides of the left and right end portions of the inclined extension portion 315, and is inclined downward toward the front side. An inclined surface portion 318 and an erected curved portion 319 which is erected from the rear side edge portion and the left and right outer edge portions of the inclined surface portion 318 and is formed to be curved toward the front side in a shape capable of guiding the sphere to the front side. Be prepared.

The opening forming portion 320 is extended to the front side along the left and right side surfaces of the sensor placement opening 321 through which the detection device SE3 is inserted from the back side and the sensor placement opening 321 to support the left and right ends of the detection sensor SE3. A pair of left and right support extension portions 322, a winning opening 323 in which an opening is formed so that a ball can pass between the support extension portion 322, and a winning opening 323 based on the support extension portion 322. A pair of discharge openings 325 that are formed to allow balls to pass through on the left and right opposite sides of the above, and a bottom surface that receives the balls that have passed through the winning opening 323 and the discharge opening 325 and guides them to the back side. A pair of bottom surface constituents 327 in which the portions are curved toward the rear and a pair extending from the lower edge of the support extension portion 322 toward the bottom surface constituent portion 327 so as to partition the upper surface side of the bottom surface constituent portion 327. A partition wall portion 328 is provided.

When the detection device SE3 is inserted into the sensor arrangement opening 321, the detection hole SE1a is designed to be arranged inside the winning opening 323. The front-rear position of the detection device SE3 can be easily positioned by abutting the positioning protrusion 322a projecting from the front edge portion of the support extension portion 322 and the front end portion of the detection device SE3.

The sphere that has passed through the direction switching portion 317 and reached the opening forming portion 320 passes through either the winning opening 323 or the discharging opening 325, and rolls on the upper surface of the bottom surface constituent portion 327 to the back side. You will be guided. Since each rolling path is divided by the partition wall portion 328, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the spheres intersect or collide with each other on the upper surface of the bottom surface constituent portion 327. As a result, the flow of the sphere can be rectified, so that it is possible to prevent the sphere from clogging or stagnation.

Among the spheres that roll on the upper surface of the bottom surface component 327, the spheres that have passed through the winning opening 323 are detected by the detection device SE3. On the other hand, the ball that has passed through the discharge opening 325 is not detected by the detection device SE3. In any case, the sphere that has rolled on the upper surface of the bottom surface component 327 is guided to a sphere discharge path (not shown) after being detected by a detection device (not shown) that detects the discharge of the sphere.

To the ball discharge path (not shown), the ball rolls the rolling surface 351 of the second component 350 toward the left and right inward while being restricted from falling off to the back side by the second auxiliary member 370, and is arranged on each of the left and right sides. It is guided by flowing through the common drop flow path 352 provided.

The second auxiliary member 370 has a front plate portion 371 that covers an open space on the back side of the inclined extension portion 315 to prevent the ball from falling off, a rolling surface 351 of the second component 350, and a common drop. A rear plate portion 372 that blocks the upper surface side and the back surface side of the flow path of the ball that flows down along the flow path 352 to prevent the ball from falling off, and a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 329 of the first component 310. An insertion hole 373 that is pierced in the front plate portion 371 so that it can be inserted, and an insertion hole 374 that is pierced in the rear plate portion 372 so that a fastening screw that is screwed into the fastening portion 353 of the second component 350 can be inserted. , Equipped with.

The material forming the second constituent member 350 and the second auxiliary member 370 can be arbitrarily set, but in the present embodiment, the second constituent member 350 is formed of a colorless opaque resin material, and the second auxiliary member is formed. 370 is formed from a colorless and transparent resin material.

As a result, the visibility of the sphere flowing through the common falling flow path 352 can be reduced and the attention to the discharged sphere can be lowered, and the light can be taken in from the back side of the second auxiliary member 370. The first constituent member 310 arranged on the front side can be brightly illuminated, and the visibility of the sphere flowing down the first constituent member 310 can be improved.

The thin plate member 380 is positioned by being housed in the sheet disposing recess 411a (see FIG. 30) of the main body plate portion 411. In this positioned state, the game board 13 is assembled, and the thin plate member 380 is sandwiched between the main body plate portion 411 and the first constituent member 310 in the front-rear direction.

The front-back and left-right displacements (arrangement changes) in the process of flowing down the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will be described. First, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 is displaced rearward along the extension plate portion 313. After that, it is distributed to the left and right by the rotational displacement of the distribution portion 983 described in the first embodiment, and is displaced to the left and right outward along the inclined extension portion 315.

After that, the flow direction is switched to the front side by the direction switching unit 317, and the displacement is forward. When a guide portion for which a curved surface for switching the flow direction of the sphere is formed is arranged on the front side of the sphere to which the sphere flows, the guide portion tends to block the line of sight to the sphere, which may reduce visibility. However, in the present embodiment, since the erected curved portion 319 as the guide portion is arranged on the back side of the sphere, it is unlikely that the erected curved portion 319 blocks the line of sight to the sphere. This makes it easier to ensure the visibility of the sphere.

After that, the sphere flowing directly below the winning opening 323 is displaced rearward along the bottom surface constituent portion 327 after being detected by the detection device SE3. Further, the sphere that is displaced to the left or right above the winning opening 323 and reaches directly above the discharging opening 325 passes through the discharging opening 325 and is displaced rearward along the bottom surface constituent portion 327. To do.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 is moved to the rear side at the beginning of the ball entry, flows to the left and right, and is moved to the front side immediately before passing through the detection device SE3. ing. As a result, as compared with the configuration of the first embodiment, the arrangement of the distribution portion 983 can be moved to the rear, and a space can be left under the extension plate portion 313.

This vacant space can be used as a space for arranging a drive mechanism for operating the electric accessory 140a of the second winning opening 140. As a result, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the second winning opening 140 can be made closer to that of the first winning opening 64 as compared with the first embodiment.

Further, when the path through which the sorted spheres flow down is configured so as to switch the path in the front-rear direction so that the paths are consistently arranged in the vertical direction (for example, the distribution unit 980 described above). The vertical width in the front view of the flow path can be shortened as compared with the case of the above configuration). As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the relative vertical arrangement of the detection device SE3 with respect to the first winning opening 64.

FIG. 35 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 in the range XXXV of FIG. In FIG. 35, the central constituent member 410 and the thin plate member 380 are shown semi-transparently so that the distribution unit 300 can be visually recognized. Further, in FIG. 35, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the electric accessory 140a in the closed state and the open state are both illustrated. In the description of FIG. 35, FIGS. 33 and 34 will be referred to as appropriate.

The thin plate member 380 is a member formed in a thin plate shape (sheet shape) from a light-transmitting resin material, and is a member that can be visually recognized by a player via a central constituent member 410. Although not shown, in the present embodiment, patterns, figures, characters or characters are colorfully drawn on the front surface of the thin plate member 380, and the difference in the mode of the emitted light (the mode of color and lightness and darkness). Depending on the difference), the color and the mode of light and darkness visually recognized through the thin plate member 380 change in various ways.

Unlike the case where the pattern, graphic, character or character is drawn directly on the base plate 60, according to the present embodiment, if the thin plate member 380 is removed, the pattern, graphic, character or character drawn on the thin plate member 380 can be drawn from the game board 13. Since it can be removed, the appearance of the game board 13 can be easily changed.

For example, when the game board 13 has the same shape but the game playability is changed (so-called different specifications), the patterns, figures, characters or characters, colors, etc. drawn on the game board 13 are different. It may make it easier for the player to grasp the playability.

When a pattern, figure, character or character is drawn directly on the base plate 60, it is necessary to replace the entire base plate 60, so that it is easy to replace the entire game board 13 in substance, and the cost for changing the game playability is high. Easy to bulk.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, it is sufficient to replace the thin plate member 380 with another thin plate member 380 having a different pattern, figure, character or character, color, etc., so it is necessary to replace the entire game board 13. There is no. Therefore, it is possible to easily suppress the cost for changing the game playability.

The mode of decoration applied to the thin plate member 380 is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, by forming a colorless and transparent range above the detection device SE3, the visibility of the sphere rolling on the inclined surface portion 318 is improved, and in the other portions, figures and patterns are drawn densely to improve the decorativeness. You may let it. Further, for example, a mark is drawn by a number or the like at a position corresponding to the winning opening 323 and the discharge opening 325 in the front view, and the profit that the player can obtain depends on which mark the ball has flowed down. You may make it easier to understand.

The thin plate member 380 is designed to have a large shape so as to project outward from the left and right sides of the through hole 60a, and is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the base plate 60 and the main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410. To.

In the present embodiment, the rear end surface of the thin plate member 380 and the front end portion of the first constituent member 310 (for example, the front end portion of the support extension portion 322) are arranged so as to be in contact with each other. That is, since the detection device SE3 is arranged close to the thin plate member 380, the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 can be brought closer to the player side. As a result, the visibility of the sphere passing through the detection device SE3 can be improved, and it is possible to easily avoid a situation in which the sphere passing through the detection device SE3 is overlooked.

Further, the detection device SE3 is arranged on the left and right outside of the electric accessory 140a in the front view, and is not hidden by the electric accessory 140a. As a result, the sphere passing through the detection device SE3 regardless of the state of the electric accessory 140a (open state, closed state) as compared with the case where the flow path of the sphere is hidden by the electric accessory 140a (see FIG. 5). Visibility can be improved.

Further, since the detection device SE3 is arranged behind the main body plate portion 411 of the central constituent member 410, it does not affect the flow mode of the sphere on the front side of the main body plate portion 411. That is, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved as compared with the case where the detection device SE3 is arranged so as to project to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 (the front side of the front end surface of the base plate 60).

Due to the strength, the nail is not arranged on the main body plate portion 411, but in the present embodiment, the path of the sphere is distributed by the distribution portion 413 or the curved protrusion portion 414 as a substitute for the nail. ing. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow path of the sphere on the front side of the main body plate portion 411 from becoming monotonous.

Both the sphere detected by the detection device SE3 through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3 (the sphere passing through the winning opening 323) and the sphere passing through the discharge opening 325 have an inclined surface portion 318. It follows a path that rolls and displaces to the front side. Therefore, there may be a difference between the number of spheres that have reached the inclined surface portion 318 and the number of spheres that are detected by the detection device SE3.

Although the visibility of the ball can be improved by displacing the ball toward the front side by the inclined surface portion 318, it is difficult to distinguish whether the ball has passed through the winning opening 323 or the discharging opening 325. Then, it is not possible to determine whether the ball does not really pass through the detection device SE3 or whether the detection failure occurs even though the ball passes through the detection device SE3, and the player may feel dissatisfied.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball passing through the winning opening 323 from the inclined surface portion 318 is visually recognized as flowing downward in the front view along the flow-down path FL31 at the time of winning, whereas the ball is inclined. The ball passing through the discharge opening 325 from the surface portion 318 is switched from downward to left and right by 90 degrees in the flow direction in front view along the flow path FL32 at the time of non-winning.

That is, it is possible to determine whether or not the sphere passes through the detection device SE3 depending on whether or not there is a left-right component in the flow direction of the sphere, so that the possibility of mistaking the passing location of the sphere is low. can do. This makes it easy to determine whether or not the sphere has passed through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3.

Because both the game ball that flows down along the flow-down path FL31 at the time of winning and the game ball that flows down along the flow-down path FL32 at the time of non-winning flow down in the vicinity of the distribution portion 413 and the curved protrusion portion 414 in the front view. , The flow path is visually recognized so as to overlap the flow path of the game ball flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a.

Therefore, the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 can be made to appear to the player as if it is flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a. The player outs the number of the launched game balls that have reached above the opening / closing plate 65b but have not entered the specific winning opening 65a (game balls that have passed when the opening / closing plate 65b is closed). In many cases, the game ball rolling on the inner rail 61 toward the mouth 71 is visually confirmed and grasped. However, since the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 flows backward along the bottom surface constituent portion 327 (see FIG. 34) after flowing down the winning flow-down path FL31 or the non-winning flow-down path FL32, the game ball flows backward. It does not appear in front of the out port 71.

As a result, the game balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 during the jackpot game can be added to the number of game balls that appear to be flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a, so that the first winning can be achieved. Regardless of the number of game balls that have entered the mouth 64, it is possible to give the illusion that most of the launched game balls have entered the specific winning opening 65a.

Further, the game ball flowing down through the inclined surface portion 318 and the game ball actually flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a are separated in the front-rear direction by the thin plate member 380, so that they may collide with each other. There is no. As a result, the above-mentioned illusion can be generated without hindering the flow of the game ball flowing down toward the specific winning opening 65a.

In the present embodiment, the case where the non-winning flow path FL32 is formed as a flow path in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the path through which the ball flowing down the inclined surface portion 318 toward the detection device SE3 flows, an opening is formed in the main body plate portion 411 and the thin plate member 380 in the front-rear direction, and by passing through this opening, non-existence is achieved. The flow path FL32 at the time of winning may be formed as a flow path through which the ball flows to the front side.

That is, the ball flowing through the flow path FL32 at the time of non-winning may return to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 and flow down toward the out port 71. In this case, if the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state, the ball flowing through the flow path FL32 at the time of non-winning can be picked up by the opening / closing plate 65b and entered the specific winning opening 65a.

That is, since it is possible to configure the game property that the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 can enter the specific winning opening 65a after returning to the front side of the main body plate portion 411 again, the first winning opening It is possible to improve the attention power to the ball that has entered the 64 (particularly, the attention power during the jackpot game in which the opening / closing plate 65b opens / closes).

Next, the structure of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 17) that is fastened and fixed to the back surface side of the game board 13 will be described. The operation unit 500 is fastened and fixed to the base plate 60 (see FIG. 2) of the game board 13 from the back side.

36, 37, 38 and 39 are front views of the operating unit 500. FIG. 36 shows the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 of the operation unit 500, FIG. 37 shows the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, and FIG. 38 shows the overhang state of the internal operation unit 600. In FIG. 39, the operation error limit state of one of the internal operation units 600 is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the retracted state is a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 of the internal operation unit 600 is arranged at the upper end position of the vertical operation range, and the intermediate state is a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted back and forth from the retracted state. In the overhanging state, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged at the lower end position of the vertical operation range, and the rotation effect is produced. The rotation axis RJ1 of the device 800 is in a state of facing the front-rear direction.

In the state change from the intermediate state to the overhanging state, the posture change (tilting operation) of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front-rear direction occurs. This posture change is executed as a rotation operation centered on a predetermined rotation axis (central axis J1 described later).

In the present embodiment, one operation error limit state is one of the states in which the tilt in the left-right direction allowed for the light emitting operation unit 700 is the limit. In FIG. 39, for convenience, the right side portion of the light emitting operation unit 700 is arranged at the same position as the retracted state, and the left side portion is shown as a state of being displaced downward. In the present embodiment, the operation unit 500 is configured so that the light emitting operation unit 700 can be operated in the vertical direction while maintaining the inclination angle of one operation error limit state, but the details will be described later. To do.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is in a posture in which the decorative plate 811 on which decorative figures and patterns are formed is directed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 37, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510, and are formed in an intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. It is visually recognized integrally (among the linear shape extending radially and the wave pattern formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is also visually recognized in the state of being formed on the rotating member 810).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the decorative plate 811 can be designed as a part of the figure that can be visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the rotating member 810 is formed on the rotating member 810. It is possible to avoid limiting the figures and patterns to be created.

Further, as shown in FIG. 38, in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted in the forward rotation direction, and the figures and patterns formed on the main body member 710 of the light emission operation effect unit 700 are formed. It is visually recognized from the front.

These figures and patterns are also formed in a manner related to the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, and are integrally visible (radially extending straight lines) in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600. Of the shape and the wavy pattern formed on the left and right outer sides, the linear shape is formed only on the bottom wall portion 511, and is visually recognized with the wavy pattern formed on the main body member 710).

That is, since the figure or pattern formed on the main body member 710 can be designed as a part of the figure that can be visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511, the size of the main body member 710 is formed on the main body member 710. It is possible to avoid limiting the figures and patterns to be created.

Since the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is displaced in the vertical direction from the retracted state to the overhanging state, the figure or pattern is integrally visible from the retracted state to the bottom in relation to the fixed bottom wall portion 511. The figures and patterns formed on the wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the rotating member 810 begin to deviate from each other.

This deviation becomes more noticeable as the amount of displacement in the vertical direction increases. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted and displaced in the overhanging state to switch the surface to be visually recognized by the player, and a new figure or pattern visually recognized integrally with the bottom wall portion 511 is newly created. It can be visually recognized by the player. Therefore, the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 and the figures and patterns formed on the light emitting operation effect unit 700 (main body member 710, rotating member 810) that are displaced in the vertical direction are in the retracted state and the overhanging state. It can be configured to be integrally visible in.

During the vertical displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 described here, the outer shape of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front view changes. As a result, a single effect unit can be made to appear as if it were a plurality of different effect units, and the degree of freedom in designing the motion effect can be improved.

FIG. 40 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 41 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In FIGS. 40 and 41, the liquid crystal display device (third symbol display device 81) arranged in the opening 511a of the back case 510 is omitted, and the back side is visually visible through the opening 511a.

The operation unit 500 includes a back case 510 formed in a box shape with the front side open from the bottom wall portion 511 and the outer wall portion 512 erected from the outer edge of the bottom wall portion 511. The back case 510 is formed in the shape of a rectangular frame in front view by forming a rectangular opening 511a in the center of the bottom wall portion 511. The opening 511a is formed in a size corresponding to the outer shape (outer edge) of the display area of the third symbol display device 81 (that is, the display area of the third symbol display device 81 can be divided in front view).

The back case 510 extends as a flat plate along the back surface of the game board 13 (for example, arranged in parallel) at the front end of the outer wall portion 512, and faces the game board 13 in the assembled state (see FIG. 2). A support plate portion 513 for supporting is provided.

The support plate portion 513 has a plurality of positioning convex portions 513a projecting in an annular shape toward the front side in a shape capable of fitting with a fitting recess (not shown) formed in the base plate 60 of the game board 13. And a plurality of insertion holes 513b in which a fastening screw to be fastened to the base plate 60 can be inserted at the center of the positioning convex portion 513a.

The rear case 510 is positioned with respect to the base plate 60 by fitting the positioning convex portion 513a to the fitting portion 60c (see FIG. 21) of the base plate 60, and the fastening screw is inserted into the insertion hole 513b to fit the fitting portion. By screwing into the female screw of 60c, the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 can be integrally fixed, so that the rigidity of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 as a whole can be improved.

The shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, an annular convex portion having an outer shape slightly smaller than the outer shape (circular in the present embodiment) of the fitting portion 60c of the base plate 60 may be used, or the fitting gap becomes large in consideration of workability at the time of assembly. A protrusion having such a shape (large diameter ring shape) may be used. Further, when the outer shape of the fitting portion 60c is formed into a rectangular shape, it is naturally assumed that the shape of the positioning convex portion 513a is also rectangular correspondingly.

The operation unit 500 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13, and a light emitting means and an operation unit are arranged inside. That is, the operating unit 500 includes a rear case 510, a decorative fixing member 520 that is inserted into the rear case 510 from the front side and fastened and fixed, and an internal operating unit 600 that is arranged on the inner upper portion of the rear case 510. It includes a light emitting effect unit 518 arranged at the lower inside of the rear case 510.

The light emitting effect unit 518 is a unit that irradiates light from the rear to the front of the distribution unit 300 and the winning opening component 400 (see FIG. 29), and is formed by the distribution unit 300 and the winning opening component 400. It functions to brightly illuminate the passage path of the sphere.

The decorative fixing member 520 is formed of a light-transmitting resin material, is symmetrically arranged at both left and right positions, and is composed of a plurality of thin plate-shaped members that can be divided into upper and lower parts, and is arranged on the upper left side. The first fixing member 530, the second fixing member 540 arranged on the lower left side, the third fixing member 550 arranged on the upper right side, the fourth fixing member 560 arranged on the lower right side, and the first The left side illuminated substrate 570 arranged on the back side of the fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540, and the right side illuminated substrate 580 arranged on the back side of the third fixing member 550 and the fourth fixing member 560. To be equipped. The configuration and role of each part will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43.

FIG. 42 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 43 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In FIGS. 42 and 43, the decorative fixing member 520 is disassembled from the rear case 510 and arranged in the front, and the internal operation unit 600 is disassembled from the rear case 510 and arranged between the rear case 510 and the decorative fixing member 520. State is illustrated.

The first fixing member 530 is formed from a thin plate-shaped insertion plate portion 531 extending in the front-rear direction, a front plate portion 534 extending to the right from the front side portion of the insertion plate portion 531 and a front side portion of the insertion plate portion 531. An outer plate portion 537 extending to the left is provided.

The insertion plate portion 531 includes a plurality of insertion protrusions 532 projecting from the extending tip portion to the back side in a shape and arrangement that can be inserted into the receiving hole 623 of the internal operation unit 600, and is an outer member of the internal operation unit 600. It has a role of preventing the outward tilt displacement of the 610. The relative functions of the insertion plate portion 531 and the outer member 610 will be described later.

The front plate portion 534 is a plate-shaped portion that is arranged in front of the left illuminated substrate 570 and is formed from a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left illuminated substrate 570 (formed so as to cover the left illuminated substrate 570). Therefore, a light diffusion process is formed on the back side in order to diffuse the light from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the front side of the left illumination substrate 570. Moreover, it is provided with an insertion hole 535 in which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operation unit 600 can be inserted.

The outer plate portion 537 is a portion that can come into contact with the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the back case 510, and is bored so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 512a formed on the outer wall portion 512 can be inserted. It is provided with an insertion hole 538.

That is, the first fixing member 530 connects and fixes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 and the outer member 610 of the internal operating unit 600 in the assembled state of the operating unit 500 (see FIG. 36).

The second fixing member 540 is a plate-shaped portion arranged at the same front-rear position as the front plate portion 534 of the first fixing member 530, and is a front plate portion arranged at a slight distance from the lower end of the front plate portion 534. The 541, the fastening extension portion 544 extending to the right from the lower right side portion of the front plate portion 541, and the outer plate portion 547 extending from the left end portion of the front plate portion 541 to the left side. Be prepared.

The front plate portion 541 is a plate-shaped portion arranged in front of the left illuminated substrate 570 and formed from a shape corresponding to the outer shape of the left illuminated substrate 570 (formed so as to cover the left illuminated substrate 570). Therefore, a light diffusion process is formed on the back side in order to diffuse the light from the light emitting means such as the LED arranged on the front side of the left illumination substrate 570.

In addition, an insertion hole 542 in which a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 of the internal operating unit 600 can be inserted and a fastening screw to be fastened and fixed to the inner member 670 of the internal operating unit 600 can be inserted. An insertion hole 543 to be drilled is provided. That is, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 can be connected and fixed by fastening and fixing via the front plate portion 541.

The connecting extension portion 544 includes an insertion hole 545 in which a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 518a of the light emitting effect unit 518 is inserted so as to be inserted. The outer plate portion 547 is a portion that can come into contact with the front portion of the outer wall portion 512 of the back case 510, and is bored so that a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 512b formed on the outer wall portion 512 can be inserted. It is provided with an insertion hole 548.

That is, the second fixing member 540 includes the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510, the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 of the inner operation unit 600, and the light emitting effect unit 518 in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 36). , Are connected and fixed.

The third fixing member 550, the fourth fixing member 560, and the right side illuminated substrate 580 are the first fixing members due to the difference in the shape of the inner member 670 of the internal operation unit 600 to be covered by being arranged on the back side. Although the shapes are slightly different from those of the 530, the second fixing member 540, and the left illumination substrate 570, they are basically formed symmetrically with the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540. Since the above is the same, the description of the overlapping portion will be omitted, and the above-mentioned reference numerals will be illustrated for convenience in the description of the first fixing member 530 and the second fixing member 540.

The order of assembling the internal operation unit 600 and the decorative fixing member 520 to the back case 510 will be described. For assembly to the rear case 510, the internal operation unit 600 is first assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 40), and then the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled to the rear case 510.

As an outline, in the process of assembling the internal operation unit 600 to the rear case 510, first, the left and right outer members 610 and the inner members 670 are fastened and fixed to the rear case 510, and then the light emitting operation effect is produced from the front side inside the rear case 510. The unit 700 is inserted and placed between the left and right outer members 610 and the inner member 670, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is placed at the assembly position with the displacement member 680, and members (screws, collars, etc.) for preventing falling off are placed. The work is performed in the order of assembling to the fastening portion 682 from the front side.

In the present embodiment, since it is not necessary to assemble the decorative fixing member 520 to the back case 510 during the assembling work of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, the front side of the back case 510 can be widely opened to the decorative fixing member 520. It is possible to avoid obstructing the flow line of the worker's hand. Thereby, work efficiency can be improved.

Moreover, since the work of inserting the fastening screw into the insertion holes 535, 538, 542, 543, 545, 548 of the decorative fixing member 520 and fastening and fixing the decorative fixing member 520 can be performed from the front side of the rear case 510, the light emitting operation effect is produced. After the work of assembling the unit 700 to the displacement member 680 is completed, the work for fastening and fixing the decorative fixing member 520 can be continuously performed without changing the posture of the rear case 510. Thereby, the work efficiency can be further improved. Next, the details of the assembly work will be described.

44 is a sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the XLIV-XLIV line of FIG. 36, FIG. 45 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the range XLV of FIG. 44, and FIG. 46 is a partially enlarged sectional view of the operating unit 500 in the range XLV of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the operation unit 500 in -XLIV line.

In FIGS. 44 and 45, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is disassembled from the rear case 510, and the decorative fixing member 520 is not shown as a state before assembling the decorative fixing member 520. On the other hand, FIG. 46 shows a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the decorative fixing member 520 are assembled to the rear case 510 (see FIG. 36).

In the present embodiment, the fastening position is designed so that sufficient rigidity is not exhibited only by fixing the internal operation unit 600 and the rear case 510 (for example, the fastening position is arranged only at one of the upper and lower ends). The internal operation unit 600 is configured to be flexible and deformable (posture changeable) with respect to the rear case 510 (see the imaginary line in FIG. 45).

Utilizing this bending deformation, it is possible to quickly assemble the light emitting operation effect unit 700. That is, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is assembled by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 682 with the fastening portion 682 inserted into the connected hole 764 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. When the 600 bends and deforms to the left and right, the dimension of the path for the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to enter toward the fastening portion 682 can be expanded to the left and right from the fixed width dimension W1 to the bending width dimension W2. Workability can be improved.

At this time, the internal operation unit 600 bends and deforms to the left and right outwards, so that the direction in which the fastening screw enters the fastening portion 682 is inclined toward the left and right inward toward the back side (the front side spreads to the left and right outside). Inclination direction).

In this case, as compared with the case where the fastening screw is inserted in the front-rear direction, the driver for screwing the fastening screw is separated (avoided) from the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 (with respect to the front-rear direction). The fastening screw can be inserted into the rear case 510 in the inclined direction).

Therefore, the fastening work can be facilitated, and the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 whose shape is designed for the purpose of avoiding contact with the driver can be improved. .. That is, it is possible to improve the work efficiency of the assembling work of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and improve the degree of freedom in designing the decorative member 750.

In order to make this effect possible, in the present embodiment, the left-right dimension of the elongated hole 764a of the connected hole 764 through which the fastening screw is inserted is set so that the fastening portion 682 is misaligned due to the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600. Designed with compatible dimensions (sufficient left and right length).

It should be noted that the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 inward to the left and right is less likely to occur than the bending deformation to the left and right outside because the tubular member 695 abuts on the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 and resistance is generated. It is configured in.

In the present embodiment, by assembling the decorative fixing member 520, the internal operation unit 600 is configured to be suppressed from bending and deforming to the left and right. This is more than the fastening position between the internal operating unit 600 and the rear case 510 (the fastening position arranged on the bottom wall portion 511 of the rear case 510, the fastening position arranged closer to the back side), the internal operating unit 600, decoration. There are more fastening positions of the fixing member 520 and the back case 510 (fastening positions arranged on the front side of the outer wall portion 512 of the rear case 510 and the internal operation unit 600, fastening positions arranged closer to the front side), and The effect is exhibited by devising the shape of the decorative fixing member 520.

First, the decorative fixing member 520 includes an outer plate portion 547 that is fastened and fixed to the outer wall portion 512 or the support plate portion 513, and the support plate portion 513 that is integrally formed with the outer wall portion 512 is attached to the base plate 60. It is fastened and fixed (see FIG. 42). That is, the displacement of the decorative fixing member 520 is restricted to the base plate 60 via the support plate portion 513. As a result, the rigidity of the decorative fixing member 520 and the internal operation unit 600 can be improved by utilizing the rigidity of the base plate 60, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be suppressed from bending and deforming to the left and right.

Secondly, the insertion plate portion 531 of the decorative fixing member 520 is abutted and arranged on the left and right outer sides of the internal operation unit 600. That is, the insertion plate portion 531 can suppress the bending deformation of the internal operation unit 600 to the left and right outside.

From these first configuration and the second configuration, it is possible to prevent the internal operation unit 600 from bending and deforming to the left and right outside when the decorative fixing member 520 is assembled.

In addition, the decorative fixing member 520 is configured to be assembled to the back case 510 from the front side, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be assembled to the back case 510 from the front side. The assembling work can be performed in a series of steps so as to assemble the decorative fixing member 520 following the assembling of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 without changing the above. Therefore, the efficiency of the assembly work can be improved.

On the other hand, if the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 from the fastening portion 682 for maintenance or the like can be performed without removing the decorative fixing member 520, the man-hours of the maintenance work can be reduced and the efficiency is high.

Here, the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 are arranged on the back side of the decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 42), and it is better to configure the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 so as to project inward to the left and right. The production range of the production can be expanded, and the production effect can be improved.

On the other hand, if the illumination boards 570 and 580 are arranged so as to project to the left and right inward as in the present embodiment, when the maintenance worker moves the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to the front side, the light emitting operation effect unit The connecting plate portions 765 formed at the left and right ends of the 700 may collide with the illuminated substrates 570 and 580, and the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 may be damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the protective extension is provided in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface of the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 from the front side edge portion of the extension wall portion 677 of the inner member 670, which will be described later, to the left and right inside. The installation portion 677b is extended (see FIG. 42).

The protective extension portion 677b has left and right inner end portions formed in the same shape as the shape line S51 (see FIG. 42) corresponding to the shape of the left and right inner edge portions on the upper portions of the illuminated substrates 570 and 580, and the shape line. It is extended to the position corresponding to S51.

As a result, the area for supporting the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 from the back surface side can be increased, and the back surface of the upper portion of the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 can be protected by the protective extension portion 677b, so that maintenance work can be performed. Occasionally, it is possible to prevent the illumination boards 570 and 580 from coming into contact with the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

On the other hand, below the lower end of the shape line S51, the formation of the extending portion inward to the left and right is omitted regardless of the shapes of the illuminated substrates 570 and 580. Therefore, when the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is performed at this position, there is a possibility that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the illumination boards 570 and 580 come into contact with each other.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to move downward and change its posture (see FIGS. 37 and 38), and the direction of the fastening portion 682 changes from the front-rear direction to the vertical direction due to the change in posture. Since the driver cannot be inserted into the fastening screw, the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be executed before the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes. Therefore, it is sufficient to form the protection extension portion 677b at a position where it is arranged before the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes, and it is designed as such in the present embodiment (see FIG. 37). ..

In this way, the protective extension portion 677b is not formed over the entire upper and lower ranges, but is limited to the minimum necessary range for avoiding contact between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the illumination substrates 570 and 580. Therefore, the formation range of the protection extension portion 677b can be narrowed.

In other words, in the present embodiment, the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 capable of performing the work of removing the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is limited to the arrangement between the retracted state and the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. By configuring it, the formation range of the protection extension portion 677b is reduced.

In this embodiment, it is of course possible to remove the light emitting operation effect unit 700 after removing the decorative fixing member 520 from the back case 510. In this case, as in the case of the assembling work, the internal operation unit 600 is bent and deformed to the left and right to the left and right, so that the left and right width of the path for taking out the light emission operation effect unit 700 can be widened. Can be prevented from coming into contact with the protective extension 677b.

FIG. 47 is an exploded front perspective view of the operating unit 500, and FIG. 48 is an exploded rear perspective view of the operating unit 500. In FIGS. 47 and 48, the state in which the internal operation unit 600 is disassembled is mainly shown, and the decorative fixing member 520 is not shown.

As shown in FIGS. 47 and 48, the internal operation unit 600 is supported by an outer member 610 that is fastened and fixed to the bottom plate portion 511 of the rear case 510 and the outer member 610 so as to be displaceable in the vertical direction and in the horizontal direction. An elevating plate member 630 arranged inside, a drive motor 648 that is a device that generates a driving force for raising and lowering the elevating plate member 630 and is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610, and a drive shaft of the drive motor 648. It is provided with a transmission gear 649 which is fixed to and transmits a driving force to the elevating plate member 630, and a coil spring SP1 which applies an upward urging force (load in the pulling direction) to the elevating plate member 630.

Further, the internal operation unit 600 is arranged inside in the left-right direction so as to arrange the elevating plate member 630 between the resistance generating device 650 configured to generate the resistance force for the movement of the elevating plate member 630 and the outer member 610. An inner member 670 that is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610 by a fastening screw that is inserted into the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and a displacement member 680 that is displaceably supported by the inner member 670 and is arranged inside in the left-right direction. A rotary posture assisting member 690 that is fastened and fixed from the left and right inside on the back side of the upper end portion of the inner member 670, and a light emitting operation effect unit 700 whose both ends are connected to the displacement member 680 are provided.

The internal operation unit 600 is a unit configured substantially symmetrically, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged in the center on the left and right, and is substantially common to be fixedly arranged on the rear case 510 side on both the left and right sides of the light emission operation effect unit 700. The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is operably supported by the configuration of.

Hereinafter, details of each configuration of the internal operation unit 600 will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50 in which each range of FIG. 47 is enlarged and illustrated. In the description of FIGS. 49 and 50, FIGS. 47 and 48 will be referred to as appropriate.

49 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the outer member 610, the elevating plate member 630 and the resistance generator 650 in the range XLIXa of FIG. 47, and FIG. 49 (b) is the outer member 610 in the range XLIXb of FIG. 47. 50 (a) is an exploded front perspective view of the elevating plate member 630, the inner member 670, the displacement member 680 and the rotational posture assisting member 690 in the range La of FIG. 47, and is an exploded front perspective view of FIG. 50 (b). ) Is an exploded front perspective view of the displacement member 680 and the rotational posture assisting member 690 in the range Lb of FIG. 47.

As shown in FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b), the outer member 610 has a plate-shaped portion 611 formed in a vertically long plate shape and the left and right outer sides (rear case) of the plate-shaped portion 611. With the extended wall portion 621 formed to partition the left and right outer regions of the plate-shaped portion 611 as well as being extended in a wall shape on the outer wall portion 512 of the 510 and adjacent to the outer wall portion 512 in the assembled state). , Equipped with.

The plate-shaped portion 611 has a pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 drilled in an oval shape that is elongated in the vertical direction, and is elongated and wide in the vertical direction behind the upper elongated hole 612 (wider than the elongated hole 612). It is provided with a wiring through hole 613 formed in an oval shape of the above, and a pair of upper and lower guide projecting portions 614 projecting in a columnar shape on the left and right outside behind the lower elongated hole 612.

The elongated holes 612 are elongated holes for limiting the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630, and a pair is arranged on the upper side and the lower side. Since the front-rear width of the elongated hole 612 is formed to be slightly wider than the diameters of the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the elevating plate member 630 to be inserted, the displacement of the elevating plate member 630 in the front-rear direction becomes small. .. These pair of elongated holes 612 are formed by intentionally shifting the front-rear arrangement. That is, the lower elongated hole 612 is arranged on the front side as compared with the upper elongated hole 612.

As a result, the support position of the upper portion of the elevating plate member 630 is on the rear side as compared with the support position of the lower portion of the elevating plate member 630. The lower portion of the member 630 is urged to the rear by gravity.

As a result, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 can be brought closer to the transmission gear 649 side, so that it is possible to prevent the rack gear portion 634 from falling off from the transmission gear 649, and to optimize the tooth relation. Can be done.

The wiring through hole 613 is an electric wiring connected inside the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and passes through the deformed opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685 and passes through the electric wiring located on the left and right outside of the inner member 670 to the outside. It is an opening for discharging to the left and right outside of the member 610.

The guide protrusion 614 functions as a portion that guides the displacement of the front-rear displacement member 653 of the resistance generator 650. That is, it functions to guide the front-rear displacement member 653 so that it can be displaced in the front-rear direction and to prevent the front-rear displacement member 653 from tilting back and forth to change its posture. Details will be described later.

The extended wall portion 621 is provided with a plurality of fastening portions 622 arranged at the front end and capable of screwing in fastening screws inserted into the decorative fixing member 520, and insertion of the decorative fixing member 520 arranged on the back side. It is provided with a pair of upper and lower receiving holes 623, which are formed so that the insertion protrusion 532 (see FIG. 43) of the plate portion 531 can be inserted. The fastening portions other than the fastening portion 622 arranged at the front end portion are mainly fastening portions for fastening and fixing the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 (see FIG. 40).

The elevating plate member 630 is inserted into and fastened to a long main body 631 whose long direction is directed in the vertical direction and a long hole 612 on the upper side of the outer member 610 which is formed so as to project from the long main body 631 to the left and right. A pair of upper fastening portions 632 formed so that screws can be screwed in, and a pair of upper fastening portions 632 formed so as to project from the long main body portion 631 to the left and right outside, and inserted into a long hole 612 on the lower side of the outer member 610, and the fastening screw is screwed in. It includes a pair of lower fastening portions 633 that can be formed, and a rack gear portion 634 that is formed in a gear tooth shape on the back surface side of the long main body portion 631 and meshes with the transmission gear 649.

Further, the elevating plate member 630 extends from the lower end of the long main body 631 to the back side and is arranged in a detection groove of a position detection device (not shown) so that the position of the long main body 631 can be detected. The front and rear elongated holes 636 formed in the elongated main body portion 631 as elongated elongated holes in the front-rear direction at the intermediate position between the detected portion 635 and the pair of upper fastening portions 632, and the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611. The fall-out prevention plate 637, which is fastened and fixed to the upper fastening portion 632 by the fastening screw arranged and inserted in, and the fastening screw arranged and inserted on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 are fastened and fixed to the lower fastening portion 633. It is provided with a contact plate 638 and a ring member C1 that is assembled to the upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 to reduce frictional resistance during operation.

The upper fastening portion 632 and the lower fastening portion 633 are arranged corresponding to the front-rear arrangement of the elongated holes 612 of the outer member 610. Therefore, the lower fastening portion 633 is arranged on the front side of the upper fastening portion 632.

The front-rear elongated holes 636 are elongated holes that guide the front-rear movement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 inserted into the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 of the inner member 670, and the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are It is formed with a front-back length that is equal to or greater than the front-back width of the formed range.

With the upper fastening portion 632 of the elevating plate member 630 inserted into the upper elongated hole 612, the dropout prevention plate 637 is fastened and fixed to the tip side of the upper fastening portion 632, and the lower fastening portion 633 is the lower elongated hole. The contact plate 638 is fastened and fixed to the tip end side of the lower fastening portion 633 while being inserted through the 612, so that the lifting plate member 630 is supported by the outer member 610 so as to be able to move up and down. Can be easily prevented.

The contacted plate 638 is provided with a locking portion for locking the lower end portion of the coil spring SP1 on the left and right outer sides. The upper end of the coil spring SP1 is locked to the locking portions 638a formed on the left and right outer sides of the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610. That is, the coil spring SP1 generates an urging force (pulling force) that urges the contacted plate 638 upward.

The dropout prevention plate 637 is formed in an oval shape, whereas the contacted plate 638 is formed in a rectangular shape. As a result, the contact area with the resistance generator 650 can be increased, and the magnitude of the load per unit area generated at the time of collision can be reduced, which will be described in detail later.

The resistance generator 650 is locked to a solenoid 651 whose displacement direction is the front-rear direction, a fixing cover 652 for accommodating the solenoid 651 and fixing the solenoid 651 to the left and right outside of the outer member 610, and a plunger of the solenoid 651. It also includes a front-rear displacement member 653 that is configured to be displaceable in the front-rear direction by being guided by a guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610.

The fixed cover 652 has a plurality of insertion holes 652a formed at both upper and lower positions of the solenoid 651 as insertion holes through which fastening screws screwed into the outer member 610 can be inserted, and a guide protrusion 614 of the outer member 610. A pair of upper and lower fitting portions 652b, in which the tip portions are recessed with a fitting arrangement dimension, are provided.

The front-rear displacement member 653 includes a pair of long holes 653a to be guided, which are bored in a long front-rear direction as long holes through which the guide protrusions 614 are inserted on both the upper and lower sides. With the long hole 653a to be guided inserted through the guide protrusion 614, the fitting portion 652b of the fixed cover 652 is fitted to the tip of the guide protrusion 614, whereby the guide protrusion of the front-rear displacement member 653. It is possible to prevent the installation portion 614 from falling off.

As shown in FIGS. 50 (a) and 50 (b), the inner member 670 has a plate-shaped portion 671 arranged to face the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610 in the left-right direction, and left and right of the plate-shaped portion 671. It is provided with an extended wall portion 677 extending outward in a wall shape, and a rectangular overhanging portion 678 formed in a rectangular shape on the left and right inward at the rear portion on the upper end side of the plate-shaped portion 671.

The plate-shaped portion 671 has a first elongated hole 672 formed as an elongated hole in the vertical direction on the back side of the elevating plate member 630 from the front-rear position, and a first elongated hole 672 on the front side of the first elongated hole 672. The second elongated hole 673 formed as an elongated hole extending in parallel with the first elongated hole 672 from the upper end portion displaced above the upper end portion of the first elongated hole 672, and the lower end portion of the second elongated hole 673. It includes a curved elongated hole 674, which is formed as a curved elongated hole to be connected.

As a connecting portion of the plate-shaped portion 671 with the back case 510, the fastening portion is shown only on the back side of the upper end portion of the inner member 670 on the left side in FIG. 48, and the fastening portion is also shown on the back side of the inner member 670. There is no. As can be seen from this, the position fixing of the plate-shaped portion 671 is not mainly the direct fastening and fixing with the back case 510, but the outer member 610 and the decorative fixing member 520 that are fastened and fixed to the back case 510 (FIG. It is due to fastening and fixing via (see 40). In other words, the plate-shaped portion 671 is indirectly fastened and fixed to the back case 510 to generate a fixing force to the back case 510.

The plate-shaped portion 671 includes a plurality of fastening portions 671a into which fastening screws inserted from the left and right outside in the left-right direction are screwed into the plate-shaped portion 611 of the outer member 610, and the inner member 670 is screwed into the fastening screw. It is fastened and fixed to the outer member 610.

The first elongated hole 672 is formed to be wider than the width of the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the first elongated hole 672 can be used as a through hole for the electric wiring, and the electric wiring connected to the light emitting operation effect effect unit 700 is exposed in the left and right inner regions of the pair of left and right inner members 670. This can be prevented, but the details will be described later.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed with the same width. The curved shape of the curved elongated hole 674 is an arc centered on the center of the tubular portion 684 in a state where the tubular portion 684 of the displacement member 680 guided to the first elongated hole 672 is located at the lower end of the first elongated hole 672. Formed as a shape.

The extended wall portion 677 includes a partition wall portion 677a formed so as to surround the first elongated hole 672 from the plate-shaped portion 671 to the left and right outside, and the illuminated substrates 570 and 580 from the front side edge portion to the left and right inside. It includes a protective extension 677b, which is extended in a shape sufficient to cover the back surface.

The displacement member 680 is formed by a box-shaped main body portion 681 formed in a substantially rectangular box shape in which the left and right inner sides are opened, and a pair of fastenings formed so as to project outward from the lateral side wall portion of the box-shaped main body portion 681. A portion 682, an extension portion 683 extending along the left and right outer side surfaces of the box-shaped main body portion 681, and a tubular portion 684 extending cylindrically from a corner of the box-shaped main body portion 681 in the left-right outer direction. A metal rod-shaped member 686 that is fitted and fixed to a fall-out prevention collar member 685 that is fastened and fixed to the tip end side of the tubular portion 684 and a fitting recess 683a that is formed as a circular recess on the base end side of the extension portion 683. A plurality of ring members 687 arranged in a gap between the members that are relatively displaced and through which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted, a large-diameter ring member 688 through which the cylindrical portion 684 is inserted, and a light emitting operation effect unit 700 are inserted in the front and rear directions. The front and rear ring members 689 to be inserted into the fastening portion 682 in a state of being arranged so as to be sandwiched (see FIG. 46) are provided.

The fastening portion 682 has a female screw portion into which a fastening screw to be inserted into the connected hole 764 of the light emitting operation effecting unit 700 is screwed, and the fastening screw causes the light emitting operation producing unit 700 to move into the displacement member 680. Be connected.

The extension unit 683 functions as a portion that protects the light emission operation effect unit 700 from contacting the inner member 670 when the light emission operation effect unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680 (extension unit 683 and the light emission operation effect unit). See FIGS. 45 and 46 for the arrangement relationship of 700).

The tubular portion 684 has a fall-prevention collar at both positions sandwiching a deformed opening 684b formed so as to penetrate the box-shaped single unit 681 in the left-right direction on the inner peripheral side and a central axis passing through the deformed opening 684a. A fastening portion 684a formed so that a fastening screw inserted through the member 685 can be screwed into the member 685 is provided.

The fall-prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the tubular portion 684 while being inserted into the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670. At the center of the fall-out prevention collar member 685, a deformed opening 685a is formed as an opening having the same size as the deformed opening 684b of the tubular portion 684.

That is, in a state where the fall prevention collar member 685 is fastened and fixed to the tubular portion 684, an opening penetrating in the left-right direction is formed on the inner peripheral side of the tubular portion 684 and the fall prevention collar member 685. This opening has a function as a through hole for electrical wiring connected to the light emitting operation effect unit 700. This will be described here.

The other end of the electrical wiring whose one end is connected to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is exposed to the outside from the wiring through hole 762 (see FIG. 48) of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and the tubular portion 684 of the displacement member 680. It is projected to the left and right outside from the first elongated hole 672 of the inner member 670 through the deformed opening 684b and the deformed opening 685a of the fall prevention collar member 685, and further passes through the wiring through hole 613 of the outer member 610 to form a plate. It is put out to the left and right outside from the part 611.

The deformed opening 685a is not a simple circular opening, but has a protruding portion (a portion through which the fastening screw is inserted) that protrudes inward from the circular diameter position, and the deformed opening 685a is in the circumferential direction. When it rotates, the projecting portion hooks the electric wiring, so that the electric wiring is displaced in the circumferential direction. As a result, it is possible to suppress the rubbing that occurs between the deformed opening 685a and the electric wiring, so that it is possible to easily prevent the electric wiring from being broken.

The other end side of the electrical wiring crawls from the left and right outside of the plate-shaped portion 611 to the back side of the back case 510 and is connected to individual relay boards. The left and right outer regions of the plate-shaped portion 611 are hidden by at least the decorative fixing member 520 (see FIG. 40).

It is conceivable that the electric wiring may be exposed at the position between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the displacement member 680 on one end side of the electric wiring, but in the present embodiment, the box-shaped main body portion 681 covers the electric wiring. As described above, the extension plate portion 763 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is extended in front of the wiring through hole 762 so as to cover the electrical wiring in a front view (see FIG. 48). ). This makes it easier to prevent the electrical wiring from being exposed at the position between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the displacement member 680.

By passing the electrical wiring in this way, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the electrical wiring is exposed in the left and right inner regions of the pair of left and right inner members 670. Therefore, as a problem that tends to occur when the electric wiring is visually recognized by the player, there is a problem that the electric wiring is arranged on the front side of the third symbol display device 81 and the display is hidden to reduce the visibility. It is possible to solve the problem that the electrical wiring is arranged in an uncoordinated manner, which makes it look dirty and reduces the effect of production. That is, the visibility of the third symbol display device 81 can be improved, and the electrical wiring can be hidden from the player.

At this time, since the arrangement of the electric wiring in the gap between the outer member 610 and the inner member 670 can be restricted by the partition wall portion 677a, the elevating plate member 630 arranged on the front side of the partition wall portion 677a. It is possible to avoid the situation where the electric wiring and the electric wiring come into contact with each other.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 has a rod shape with a brim by fitting an E-ring into the left and right outer ends, thereby preventing the member from falling off from the left and right outer ends. As for the insertion order of the metal rod-shaped member 686, the left and right inner ends are the ring member 687, the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the ring member 687, and the second elongated hole 673 of the inner member 670 (curved elongated hole 674). , The ring member 687 and the fitting recess 683a of the displacement member 680 are inserted in this order, and are fitted and fixed to the fitting recess 683a of the extension portion 683.

As described above, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is a member inserted through the elevating plate member 630 and the inner member 670, and the vertical arrangement depends on the arrangement change due to the elevating operation of the elevating plate member 630, and the front-rear arrangement is the first. 2 Depends on the arrangement of the elongated holes 673 and the curved elongated holes 674. The arrangement and posture of the displacement member 680 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fitted and fixed are changed according to the change in the arrangement of the metal rod-shaped member 686. The arrangement of the production unit 700 and the change in posture will be described later.

The front-rear ring member 689 includes a plate-shaped ring member 689a arranged on the box-shaped main body portion 681 side, and a flanged ring member 689b on which a flange extending outward is formed at an end portion of the cylinder.

The plate-shaped ring member 689a and the flanged ring member 689b are configured such that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is sandwiched between the plate-shaped portions arranged in the front-rear direction, and the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the flanged ring member 689b is connected in an intermediate manner, which will be described later. It is arranged on the inner peripheral side of the connected hole 764 of the member 760.

The rotary posture assisting member 690 is arranged on the left and right inside of the rectangular overhanging portion 678 of the inner member 670, and the fastening screw inserted from the left and right inside is screwed into the fastening portion of the rectangular overhanging portion 678 to form a rectangular overhang. It is fastened and fixed to the portion 678.

The rotary posture assisting member 690 is a box-shaped main body 691 formed in a box shape in which the left and right insides are opened and fastened and fixed to a rectangular overhanging portion 678, and a box-shaped main body arranged inside the left and right sides of the box-shaped main body 691. A tubular member 695 that is rotatably supported by the portion 691 is provided.

The box-shaped main body portion 691 includes an extension portion 692 extending downward from the left and right inner ends on the back side, and the tubular member 695 is supported by a rotation shaft extending in the left-right direction on the left and right inside of the extension portion 692. Has been done. That is, since the tubular member 695 is arranged at the back side end portion and the lower side position of the box-shaped main body portion 691 and is arranged away from the player, the tubular member 695 is prevented from being excessively conspicuous. be able to.

The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is a unit connected to the fastening portions 682 of the displacement members 680 arranged on both the left and right sides, and the arrangement and the posture change by changing the arrangement and the posture of the displacement members 680 on the left and right sides.

51 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, FIG. 52 is a rear exploded perspective view of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and FIG. 53 is an exploded front perspective view of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. .. Note that FIG. 53 shows an exploded view of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in a directional view looking up. Further, in FIG. 53, in addition to the light emitting operation effect unit 700, the displacement member 680 is shown in a corresponding arrangement.

The light emitting operation effect unit 700 includes a main body member 710 on which the rotation effect device 800 is arranged, a lower plate member 730 arranged below the main body member 710 and fastened and fixed to the main body member 710, and the main body member 710 and below. An intermediate plate member 740 arranged between the plate member 730 and closing the front side of the space, a plurality of decorative members 750 fixed to the front side of the intermediate plate member 740, and left and right arranged on the left and right sides of the main body member 710. It includes a pair of left and right intermediate connecting members 760 that are fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 by fastening screws that are inserted from the outside.

The main body member 710 is formed in a box shape in which the lower side and the front side are opened, and a plurality of fastening portions 711 formed so that a fastening screw to be inserted into the lower plate member 730 from below can be screwed in, and the front surface of the top plate. A plurality of sandwiching portions 713 arranged to face the front edge portion 712 with dimensions capable of sandwiching the intermediate plate member 740 between the front edge portion 712 extending downward from the side edge and the front edge portion 712. A pair of left and right fixed plate portions 720 formed so as to connect the top plate and the back side wall portion on both the left and right sides are provided.

The fixed plate portion 720 is formed in a flat plate shape along a plane intersecting the left-right direction axis so that the intermediate connecting member 760 can be supported on a surface, and a fastening screw inserted from the left and right outside into the intermediate connecting member 760 is screwed. It includes a plurality of fastening portions 721 that are formed so as to be able to be inserted and used for fastening and fixing the intermediate member 760, and a recessed portion 722 that is recessed in a substantially semicircular shape at the lower end portion on the back surface side.

The recessed portion 722 is formed so that the semicircular central axis is aligned with the central axis of the wiring through hole 762 bored in the intermediate connecting member 760. As a result, the opening formed by the recessed portion 722 and the lower plate member 730 and the wiring through hole 762 can be arranged in a straight line on the left and right, so that the electrical wiring can be easily passed through the wiring through hole 762. ..

The lower plate member 730 has a plurality of insertion holes 731 for inserting a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 711 of the main body member 710, and a plurality of ridge portions 732 which are arranged so as to face each other in the front and rear in the vicinity of the front edge portion. And.

The lower plate member 730 is light-diffused on the left and right outer portions of the lower surface, and is formed so as to reduce visibility when looking at the back side through the member. As a result, even when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is visually recognized from the lower plate member 730 side when looking up (see FIG. 53), it is difficult to visually recognize the electric wiring and the driving device arranged inside the unit 700. be able to.

Further, a pattern, a figure or the like may be drawn on the left and right inner portions of the lower surface of the lower plate member 730 (the white-painted portions having a substantially circular shape in FIG. 53). As a result, even in a situation where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged on the front upper side of the third symbol display device 81 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 (see FIG. 36), the lower surface is visually recognized by the player. By making the player visually recognize the pattern or figure of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, the effect can be maintained.

The ridge portion 732 is formed so as to perform the same function as the front edge portion 712 and the holding portion 713 of the main body member 710. That is, the intermediate plate member 740 is arranged side by side in the front-rear direction so as to be able to hold the intermediate plate member 740.

The intermediate plate member 740 is formed in a thin plate shape in which the left and right central portions project toward the front side along the shape of the front edge portion of the lower plate member 730, and a plurality of illuminated substrates 741 are fastened and fixed on the back surface side. Will be done.

The intermediate plate member 740 is held by being sandwiched between the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730. That is, the upper edge portion of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched between the front edge portion 712 and the sandwiching portion 713 of the main body member 710, and the lower edge portion of the intermediate plate member 740 is sandwiched by the ridge portion 732 of the lower plate member 730. It is retained by. Therefore, the number of fastening screws for assembly can be reduced as compared with the case where the intermediate plate member 740 is fastened and fixed to the main body member 710 and the lower plate member 730.

The illumination substrate 741 is arranged at the center on the left and right and on both the left and right sides, and is configured to be able to irradiate the front side with light from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on the front side. As a result, it is possible to execute a light emitting effect that causes the decorative member 750 to emit light.

The light emitting means arranged on the illumination substrate 741 only irradiates the front side with light, and the light emitting means for irradiating the light below (lower plate member 730 side) is not arranged, but the lower plate member. When the player visually recognizes the 730, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged diagonally in front of and above the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 36), so that the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81 is the lower plate. The member 730 will be irradiated. That is, since the brightness of the lower plate member 730 can be ensured by the light emitted from the third symbol display device 81, the possibility that the effect of the lower plate member 730 is reduced can be reduced.

The decorative member 750 is a decorative member arranged at the center position on the left and right of the intermediate plate member 740, and is arranged on both the left and right sides of the central decorative member 751 having a three-dimensional shape formed of a thin-walled resin material and the central decorative member 751. A pair of left and right members to be fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing a fastening screw inserted into the intermediate plate member 740 from the back surface side.

The member to be fastened 755 includes a plurality of fastening portions 756 into which the fastening screw is screwed, and the central decorative member 751 is bored at a position corresponding to the fastening portion 756 with an inner diameter slightly larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 756. It is provided with a plurality of position holding holes 752 to be provided.

The fixing of the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740 is not by a fixing means dedicated to the central decorative member 751, but by inserting a fastening portion 756 for fastening and fixing the member to be fastened 755 to the intermediate plate member 740. It is done. Therefore, the work man-hours for assembling the central decorative member 751 to the intermediate plate member 740 can be reduced, and the number of fastening screws can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the plurality of fastening portions 756 are formed so as to be connected by a plate-shaped portion 757 having a curved cross section. The plate-shaped portion 757 has a shape corresponding to the base end side contact surface portion 753 which is an edge portion of the central decorative member 751 and abuts on the front surface of the intermediate plate member 740.

As a result, in a state where the fastening member 755 is fastened and fixed to the intermediate plate member 740 by screwing the fastening screw into the fastening portion 756, the base end side contact surface portion 753 is held between the plate-shaped portion 757 and the intermediate plate member. Since it can be supported by sandwiching it with the 740, the arrangement of the central decorative member 751 can be stabilized.

The intermediate connecting member 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (d). In the description of FIGS. 54 (a) to 54 (d), FIGS. 51 to 53 are appropriately referred to.

54 (a) is a front view of the intermediate connecting member 760 on the right side, and FIG. 54 (b) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the direction of the arrow LIVb of FIG. 54 (a). c) is a side view of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the direction of arrow LIVc in FIG. 54 (a), and FIG. 54 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the intermediate connecting member 760 in the LIVd-LIVd line of FIG. 54 (a). Is.

The intermediate connecting member 760 is a portion of the main body member 710 that faces the fixed plate portion 720 and has a plate-shaped portion 761 having a plurality of insertion holes 761a into which a fastening screw screwed into the fastening portion 721 is inserted. , A wiring through hole 762 formed in the lower part on the back side of the plate-shaped portion 761 in the left-right direction, an extension plate portion 763 extending in the left-right direction from the plate-shaped portion 761 in a flat plate shape, and an extension thereof. A connected hole 764 formed in the outer portion in the width direction of the plate portion 763, and a pair of connecting plate portions 765 extended so as to be connected to the plate-shaped portion 761 in the central portion in the width direction of the extended plate portion 763. A shielding extension plate 766 extending from one side end portion (lower plate member 730 side end portion) in the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 to the front side (intermediate plate member 740 side) is provided.

The angle between the straight line connecting the two insertion holes 761a arranged in the front-rear direction at the substantially central portion in the vertical direction of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the horizontally oriented horizontal straight line HL71 is designed as an inclination angle θ71. The angle of the tilt angle θ71 is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the tilt angle θ71 is about 5 degrees.

The plane on which the extension plate portion 763 is formed is arranged on the vertical straight line VL71 (pointing at a direction perpendicular to the horizontal straight line HL71) in the direction of gravity (the angle is set to 0). By arranging the extension plate portion 763 on the vertical straight line VL71, it is possible to facilitate the work of assembling the light emitting operation effect unit 700 to the displacement member 680 from the front side as described above.

The inclination angle θ71 of the insertion hole 761a corresponds to the inclination angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 in a state where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is assembled to the displacement member 680. Therefore, it is possible to realize a design (see FIG. 55) in which the initial posture of the rotation effect device 800 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted while maintaining the workability of assembling the intermediate connection member 760 to the displacement member 680. ..

In this case, even in the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the optical axis of the light emitted from the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 can be directed diagonally forward. As a result, the light emitted from the rotating member 810 can illuminate the vicinity of the peripheral edge of the game board 13 (for example, a place where the light from the third symbol display device 81 is difficult to reach), so that the entire game board 13 can be illuminated. It can be bright and easy to see.

The connected holes 764 are formed at two locations on the extending plate portion 763, but are formed so as to have different shapes on the left and right. That is, in the intermediate connecting member 760 on the left side, long elongated holes 764a are formed on the left and right sides of the extending plate portion 763 on both sides in the width direction. On the other hand, in the intermediate connecting member 760 on the right side, a long hole 764a is formed on one side (upper side in FIG. 36) of the extension plate portion 763 in the width direction, and a substantially circular shape is formed on the opposite side in the width direction (lower side in FIG. 36). A support hole 764b to be provided is formed (see FIG. 36).

The connecting plate portion 765 is a portion for reinforcing the angular relationship (positional relationship) between the plate-shaped portion 761 and the extended plate portion 763 so as to be able to be held. In the posture shown in FIG. 53, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 that supports the plate-shaped portion 761 is along the vertical direction (gravitational direction). Part 763 is hard to break.

On the other hand, as will be described later, the intermediate connecting member 760 is configured to be tiltable, and when the intermediate connecting member 760 is tilted forward by about 90 degrees, the width direction of the extension plate portion 763 is the front-rear direction (the direction orthogonal to the gravity direction). Therefore, the extension plate portion 763 is easily broken with respect to the plate-shaped portion 761 due to the weight of the light emitting effect unit 700.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the connecting plate portion 765 is reinforced, it is possible to easily prevent the extension plate portion 763 from breaking with respect to the plate-shaped portion 761. That is, it is possible to easily avoid a defect (occurrence of breakage) caused by the posture change of the intermediate connecting member 760.

The shielding extension plate 766 has a function of blocking the view to the connected hole 764 when looking up (see FIG. 53) and a decorative pattern is formed on the outer surface (lower surface of FIG. 53) to provide an effect area by decoration. It has a function to expand.

As shown in FIG. 53, a striped pattern is formed on the lower side surface of the box-shaped main body portion 681 of the displacement member 680 in the same manner as the decorative pattern is formed on the lower side surface of the shielding extension plate 766 of the intermediate connecting member 760. It is formed. Therefore, the lower side surface of the shielding extension plate 766 and the lower side surface of the box-shaped main body portion 681 can be made easy to see integrally, so that the area where the decorative pattern (decorative pattern, striped pattern) is formed. Can be opened and visually recognized.

Thereby, in the assembled state of the operation unit 500 (see FIG. 36), the effect of the intermediate connecting member 760 and the displacement member 680 in the directional view looking up at the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be improved.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect of using the light emitting operation effect unit 700 not only when the left and right central portions of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 are visually recognized but also when the left and right end portions are visually recognized when looking up. Can be done.

The rotation effect device 800 includes a rotating member 810, a drive motor 820 that generates a driving force for rotationally displacing the rotating member 810, and a posture detecting means 830 that rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810 to detect the posture of the rotating member 810. And.

The rotating member 810 is rotatably supported by the main body member 710 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and a low friction bearing is used for the support. As a result, even when the rotating member 810 is rotationally driven, it is possible to reduce the degree to which the load associated with the rotation of the rotating member 810 is transmitted to the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

In the rotating member 810, the decorative plate 811 on which the decoration is formed, the heat radiating plate 812 formed in the outer shape corresponding to the decorative plate 811 and arranged to face the decorative plate 811, and the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 are fastened and fixed. It is arranged between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 and the rotating base member 813 which is formed with a circular cross section and is supported by the main body member 710 so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction at the center position of the circular cross section. The arch-shaped transparent member 814 is provided.

The decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 are members having a similar shape formed of a colored (black in the present embodiment) resin material, and the decorative plate 811 is mainly formed with decorations such as figures and patterns. The heat radiating plate 812 is provided with an intake opening 812a arranged in a row from the rotation base member 813 side as the rotation base end side toward the rotation tip side (longitudinal end side of the rotation member 810).

The arch-shaped transmissive member 814 is formed of a colorless and transparent resin material and has an arch shape formed along the curved surface of the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812, and is formed between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812. It is fixed. Light emitted from a light emitting means such as an LED arranged on an illuminated substrate (not shown) arranged between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 through the arch-shaped transmitting member 814 is emitted from the rotating member 810. It travels in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation.

Light emitting means such as LEDs arranged on the illumination board are arranged in a row along the curved shape of the rotating member 810 like the intake opening 812a, and the interval between the rows is set narrower than that of the intake opening 812a. To. By turning on and off the plurality of LEDs in accordance with the rotation of the rotating member 810 (rotational light emission effect), it is possible to execute an afterimage display (afterimage display by the afterimage effect) that makes a specific display visually recognized by the afterimage of light. Become.

The light emitted from each LED is partitioned inside the rotating member 810 so as to be adjacent to each other in the radial direction of rotation, and is configured to travel in each passage extending in a direction parallel to the axis of rotation, and enters the other passages. Formed so that there is no. As a result, the traveling path of the light emitted from each LED (the diameter of the displacement locus of the LED light in the rotational emission effect) can be clarified, so that the afterimage display can be visually recognized as a clear display.

Rough surface processing (diffusion processing) is formed on the concave side surface of the arch-shaped transparent member 814. As a result, the LED light can be diffusely reflected and diffused, so that the glare is suppressed as compared with the case where the LED light is directly visually recognized.

The intake opening 812a of the heat radiating plate 812 will be described. The intake opening 812a is formed in the tangential direction of the rotating member 810 in the rotational circumferential direction, and acts to take in air between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812 when the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced.

Of the configuration of the position between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812, the opposite side (lower side in FIG. 51) of the arch-shaped transparent member 814 is open, and air can be discharged. Further, between the decorative plate 811 and the heat radiating plate 812, a recess extending continuously along an arch shape extending in the radial direction of rotation is formed as an air passage.

That is, when the rotating member 810 is rotated, the air taken in from the intake opening 812a flows outward in the rotational radial direction through the recess along the arch shape of the arch-shaped transmissive member 814, and is discharged to the back side. , Air can be discharged into the atmosphere. Since the heat inside the rotating member 810 can be dissipated (heat radiated) to the outside by this air flow, it is possible to easily avoid problems caused by the high temperature of the illuminated substrate.

Arch shape The arch shape of the transmissive member 814 allows air to be smoothly sent to the back surface side, and it is possible to avoid the generation of vortices. As a result, air can be smoothly taken in from the back surface side of the rotating base member 813 side, so that cooling in the vicinity of the rotating shaft can be performed.

In other words, when air is flowed outward in the radial direction, the air pressure inside the radial direction is lowered, so that air can be taken in from the back side and the air flow can be circulated during rotation. As a result, the heat dissipation effect can be continuously generated.

The cooling action due to the flow of air is not expected only when the rotational light emission effect is executed, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, even when the rotating member 810 is swung back and forth in the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, air circulation through the intake opening 812a is generated, and the illumination substrate can be cooled. it can.

In the present embodiment, the intake opening 812a is not formed in the decorative plate 811 in consideration of decorativeness (see FIG. 37). Since the intake of air through the intake opening 812a acts to take in the air in the traveling direction of the intake opening 812a, if the rotation direction is fixed in one direction, the side that takes in the air is the rotating member. It will be biased to one side in the longitudinal direction of the 810, and the cooling effect of the illuminated substrate may be halved.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the rotation direction of the rotating member 810 is not fixed in one direction, but is rotated in one rotation direction in the first effect mode, and is rotated in another rotation direction in a different second effect mode. It is controlled to do. As a result, it is possible to prevent the air intake side from being biased to one side in the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810, and a sufficient cooling effect of the illuminated substrate can be expected.

The attitude detecting means 830 includes a detecting gear 831 that meshes with a gear portion pivotally supported by the rotating shaft of the rotating member 810 and rotates synchronously with the rotating member 810, and an axial direction from the radial outer portion of the detecting gear 831. A detection groove is arranged at a position where the extension portion extending in parallel can enter, and the detection sensor 832 capable of detecting the phase of the detection gear 831 by detecting that the extension portion has entered the detection groove. , Equipped with.

As a design of the posture detecting means 830, it is possible to arbitrarily design which posture the rotating member 810 is in, but in the present embodiment, the rotating member 810 has a decorative plate 811 on the decorative member 750 side. At least it is detected that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is in a posture along the left-right direction and the decorative plate 811 is in a posture (appropriate posture, see FIG. 51) arranged on the front side in the arranged state. The formation position of the extension portion of the detection gear 831 is designed so that the detection gear 831 can be formed.

55 to 57 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the LV-LV line of FIG. 36. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled state are shown in FIGS. 55 to 57. In FIGS. 55 to 57, how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the retracted state to the extended state is illustrated in chronological order.

That is, in FIG. 55, the internal operation unit 600 is shown in the retracted state, in FIG. 56, the internal operation unit 600 is shown in the intermediate state, and in FIG. 57, the internal operation unit 600 is shown in the overhanging state.

As shown in FIGS. 55 to 57, the internal operation unit 600 is configured so that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 are displaced in the process of changing the state from the retracted state to the overhanging state. The displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 is configured such that the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rotation direction occur in stages, and the details will be described later.

In the configuration of the present embodiment, the arrangement of the rotation effect device 800, which is particularly attracting attention, will be described. Since the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 change their postures in the forward rotation direction, the front and rear of the rotation effect device 800 in the overhanging state are compared with the arrangement in the front-rear direction of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state and the intermediate state. The directional arrangement is located on the front side.

As a result, by locating the rotation effect device 800 on the back side in the retracted state, a space can be secured on the front side of the rotation effect device 800, so that the decorative portion 247 and the lighting board 251 are arranged closer to the front to produce the effect. While it is possible to improve the effect, the position of the rotation effect device 800 when executing the rotation light emission effect for rotating the rotation effect device 800 in the overhanging state can be brought closer to the player side, so that the rotation light emission effect can be improved. The power of can be increased. Therefore, both the effect of the effect in the retracted state and the effect of the effect in the overhang state can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the light irradiation direction LD81 from the rotation effect device 800 is set to the front side in the overhanging state. On the other hand, the light irradiation direction LD81 is set not directly above but diagonally forward in consideration of being used for light production even in the intermediate state and the retracted state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the utility value of the rotation effect device 800 as a light effect means from being extremely lowered in the intermediate state and the retracted state. The details of the light effect will be described later.

As the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is set diagonally forward, the posture of the light emission operation effect unit 700 changes from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the overhanging state. The attitude change angle in the forward rotation direction required for this is smaller than 90 degrees. As a result, the time and space required for the posture change can be shortened as compared with the case where the posture change angle is 90 degrees.

In the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 that supports the rotation effect device 800 is in an inclined posture in the forward rotation direction, so that the front-rear width is slightly increased. Therefore, normally, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged closer to the back side, or the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is designed to be suppressed inside the central opening 60b of the base plate 60 in front view. , The collision between the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the base plate 60 is to be avoided.

However, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged closer to the back side, the power of the effect may be halved because the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is far from the player. Further, when the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is suppressed inside the central opening 60b, the operation tends to be small and the force of the effect may be halved.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the space on the back side is secured by using the central configuration unit 240 which is thinner than the base plate 60. Further, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 251 in the front-rear direction for improving the effect effect is kept within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60, and a recessed portion 252a is formed in the substrate holding plate 252 to be between the illuminated substrate 251 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700. It is designed to form a gap. As a result, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is prevented from colliding with the configuration of the game board 13 while improving the degree of freedom in the posture and arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

The posture change in the forward rotation direction of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 is not started in the retracted state, but descends in the same posture until the intermediate state, and the posture change is started from the intermediate state. The start position of this posture change is defined by the shapes of the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674, as will be described later, and is defined by the shape of the driving device (drive motor 648, solenoid 651). It is configured so as not to be changed depending on the control mode.

In the intermediate state, as can be seen from the fact that the rotation effect device 800 is located below the vertical position H1 (see FIG. 56) of the lower edge portion of the decorative portion 247 in the cross section at the center of the left and right, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 Since the central opening 60b is located in front of the rotation effect device 800 and the base plate 60 of the game board 13 is not arranged, there is no possibility of collision.

By starting the posture change of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the forward rotation direction from the state where there is no possibility of collision, the possibility that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 collide with the game board 13 is reduced. be able to.

As a result, it is possible to avoid that the space for arranging the illumination substrate 251 and the decorative portion 247 is limited by overlapping with the displacement locus of the forward rotation direction displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the arrangement positions of the illuminated substrate 251 and the decorative portion 247.

Next, a configuration for stepwisely dividing the displacement modes of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 will be described. In the present embodiment, the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is configured to be guided by two elongated holes having different shapes.

58 (a) to 58 (c) show the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 schematically showing the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674. It is a schematic side view of.

FIG. 58 (a) shows the arrangement of the configuration of the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state, FIG. 58 (b) shows the arrangement of the configuration of the internal operation unit 600 in the intermediate state, and FIG. 58 (c) shows the arrangement of the configuration. , The arrangement of the configuration of the internal operation unit 600 in the overhanging state is illustrated.

In FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), in order to facilitate understanding, the outer shapes of the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, the box-shaped main body portion 681 and the extension portion 683 of the displacement member 680 are imaginary lines. The outlines of the tubular portion 684 of the displacement member 680 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 (outer lines of the portion surrounded by the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674) are shown in solid lines. Illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), in the present embodiment, the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed from different shapes, and a light emitting operation effect is produced. The light emitting effect unit 700 is configured to be displaced stepwise by changing the guidance of the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 corresponding to the vertical position and posture of the unit 700 depending on the arrangement. The details will be described below.

The driving force is transmitted to the displacement member 680 that holds the light emitting effect unit 700 via the elevating plate member 630. That is, in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the front and rear elongated holes 636 are on the most upstream side of the driving force transmission path generated by the drive motor 648 (see FIG. 47).

That is, as the elevating plate member 630 is displaced up and down in the vertical direction, the metal rod-shaped member 686 arranged inside the front and rear elongated holes 636 is displaced in the allowable direction, and the other portion is displaced by the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686. Follows and displaces.

First, the first elongated hole 672 and the second elongated hole 673 are arranged so that the elongated directions coincide with each other in the vertical direction and are parallel to each other. Therefore, while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the second elongated hole 673 and the tubular portion 684 is guided to the first elongated hole 672 (between the retracted state and the intermediate state), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is connected to the displacement member 680. The displacement of the light emitting effect unit 700 in the forward rotation direction is suppressed, and the light emitting unit 700 is displaced in parallel in the vertical direction.

Next, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the curved elongated hole 674, and the curved elongated hole 674 is in an intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (a state in which the tubular portion 684 is in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672). It is formed along an arc having the center of the tubular portion 684 as the central axis J1 and is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 673.

Therefore, while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the curved elongated hole 674 (between the intermediate state and the overhanging state), the vertical position of the tubular portion 684 is maintained, and the metal rod-shaped member 686 is centered on the central axis J1. By rotationally displacing the light emitting effect unit 700, the light emitting effect unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction about the central axis J1.

When the elevating plate member 630 is moved up from the state shown in FIG. 58 (c), the driving force is transmitted to the metal rod-shaped member 686 via the front and rear elongated holes 636, but the elevating plate member is transmitted to the tubular portion 684. No direct driving force transmission from the 630 occurs.

Therefore, the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is maintained in a state of being in contact with the lower end of the first elongated hole 672 until the internal operation unit 600 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 58B). Then, when moving from the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 to the retracted state (see FIG. 58 (a)), the tubular portion 684 is moved via the box-shaped main body portion 681 to which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is fixed. The tubular portion 684 moves ascending in a manner of being lifted by the elevating plate member 630.

That is, the displacement of the displacement member 680 accompanying the lowering of the elevating plate member 630 is designed as a displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (a) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) and then to the state of FIG. 58 (c). The displacement of the displacement member 680 accompanying the rise of the elevating plate member 630 is designed as a displacement from the state of FIG. 58 (c) to the state of FIG. 58 (b) and then to the state of FIG. 58 (a). Will be done.

It is the front-rear elongated holes 636 that transmit the driving force of these displacements, the displacement direction is defined as the vertical direction (straight direction), and the front-rear length is such that the metal rod-shaped member 686 passes through the curved elongated holes 674. Is set as long enough to allow. That is, since it is not necessary to switch the displacement direction of the front and rear elongated holes 636 according to the change in the displacement mode of the light emitting effect unit 700, the design of the elevating plate member 630 can be simplified.

The light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state is set diagonally forward, while the light irradiation direction LD81 of the rotation effect device 800 in the overhanging state is set forward. The displacement angle of the 700 in the forward rotation direction is designed to be slightly smaller than 90 degrees.

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the wide first elongated hole 672 is formed in the deformed opening 684b of the tubular portion 684 (see FIG. 50 (a)). Functions as a wiring through hole for passing electrical wiring, and one purpose is to form a sufficiently large gap for passing electrical wiring.

Further, for another purpose, the support area (area of the peripheral surface) can be increased when the shaft supported when the light emitting effect unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction has a large diameter. As a result, the load (friction force) generated per unit area of the support portion (first elongated hole 672) at the time of displacement accompanied by a change in posture can be reduced, so that local wear can be avoided and the cylinder can be avoided. The durability of the shape portion 684 and the first elongated hole 672 can be improved. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the material of the member can be improved, and for example, even if the tubular portion 684 is made of a resin material, sufficient durability can be provided.

The second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are elongated holes for guiding the displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686, and are narrower in width than the first elongated hole 672. The driving force generated by the drive motor 648 is transmitted to the metal rod-shaped member 686 via the elevating plate member 630. Although the metal rod-shaped member 686 has a small diameter, it is made of metal, and it is not necessary to pass electrical wiring inside, and the inside is filled, so that sufficient strength can be exhibited.

Since the widths of the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 are formed to be narrow, the clearance between the second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 can be reduced, so that the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be stabilized. it can.

Therefore, the misalignment of the metal rod-shaped member 686 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 (a state in which the displacement in the vertical direction and the displacement in the forward rotation direction can be switched) can be reduced. As a result, the stepwise switching of the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be smoothly executed.

The direction in which the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 acts in the process of displacement will be described. In FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (c), the position of the center of gravity G1 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is shown.

It is the elevating plate member 630 that regulates the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680, but the tubular portion 684 is not directly supported by the elevating plate member 630. Therefore, the tubular portion 684 is suspended from the elevating plate member 630 via the box-shaped main body portion 681, the extending portion 683, and the metal rod-shaped member 686, and the displacement is limited to the first elongated hole 672. The placement is maintained.

Therefore, from the retracted state to the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, a load (metal rod shape) that displaces the tubular portion 684 downward along the direction in which the metal rod-shaped member 686 is the rotation axis by the own weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Since a load in the backflip direction centered on the member 686) is generated, the tubular portion 684 is urged diagonally forward and downward by the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

As a result, the tubular portion 684 can be brought into contact with the front side surface of the first elongated hole 672, and the large diameter ring member 688 (see FIG. 50 (a)) can be configured to roll in one direction. Compared with the case where the sliding direction is not fixed, the wear of the tubular portion 684, the large diameter ring member 688, and the first elongated hole 672 can be suppressed.

On the other hand, from the intermediate state to the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the tubular portion 684 is supported by the first elongated hole 672 (the downward displacement is restricted). Therefore, due to the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is maintained at the lower end of the first elongated hole 672, and the metal rod-shaped member 686 is directed downward along the direction with the tubular portion 684 as the rotation axis. Since a load (load in the forward rotation direction centered on the tubular portion 684) is generated, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is urged in the direction along the arc centered on the central axis J1 due to the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Will be done.

Therefore, since the load when the internal operation unit 600 starts the state change from the intermediate state to the overhanging state is generated by its own weight, the displacement can be smoothly generated. In the present embodiment, since the center of gravity position G1 is arranged between the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the tubular portion 684 in the front-rear direction, the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the tubular portion 684 that serve as the shaft to the center of gravity position G1 It is possible to avoid excessively long distances.

As a result, both the load in the rotation direction centered on the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the load in the rotation direction centered on the tubular portion 684 can be prevented from becoming excessive and can be generated with an appropriate size.

During the vertical displacement of the displacement member 680, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is configured to overtake the tubular portion 684. With this configuration, the tubular portion 684 can be stopped and only the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be displaced in the vertical direction.

The driving force required to start the ascending displacement of the displacement member 680 as compared with the case where the tubular portion 684 is also ascending and displaced at the start of the ascending displacement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 from the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600. Can be reduced. This makes it possible to reduce the size of the drive motor 648.

Further, by shortening the vertical displacement width of the tubular portion 684, the vertical displacement width of the electric wiring inserted through the tubular portion 684 can be shortened. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the occurrence of disconnection of the electrical wiring.

The appearance of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 in the front view will be described. In the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is displaced in the forward rotation direction to execute a different mode of light emitting effect.

59 to 61 are front views of the operating unit 500. In FIGS. 59 to 61, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative portion 247 of the central configuration unit 240, and the illuminated substrate 251 are schematically shown, and the inside of the decorative portion 247 and the illuminated substrate 251 is shown. Illuminated in white.

In FIGS. 59 to 61, the inside of the decorative portion 247 and the illuminated substrate 251 is painted white to express that the light transmission is lowered. In reality, the illumination substrate 251 is formed of an impermeable material and blocks the player's field of view, but the decorative portion 247 is formed of a light transmissive material, so it can be said that the light transmission is low. , The player's field of view passes (the configuration on the back side can be visually recognized via the decorative portion 247).

FIG. 59 shows the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 60 shows the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 61 shows the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged behind the decorative portion 247 and the illumination board 251 and most of them are hidden in the front view. Therefore, the visibility of the rotation effect device 800 itself is low. In this state, the elevating plate member 630 is arranged at the upper end of the vertical displacement by being detected by the detection device when the detected unit 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown). The determination is made by the voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4).

Further, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 are visually recognized in a state of being divided by the decorative portion 247. Therefore, the light emitting operation unit 700 executes the light effect toward the front side, which is executed by irradiating the decorative member 750 with the light emitted from the illuminated substrate 741 (see FIG. 51), and the rotation effect device 800 performs the outer rail 62. When performing an upward light effect that irradiates light toward, each light effect can be visually recognized separately, so that each light effect can be made to stand out.

In the present embodiment, a surface curved in a bow shape (a surface arranged so as to face the outer rail 62 in the vertical direction in the front view) and the outer rail 62 are convex upward as a portion to irradiate light from the rotation effect device 800. It is designed with a similar shape as a curved shape.

Therefore, when the rotation effect device 800 is in a posture different from the posture for executing the rotation light emission effect described later, the rotation effect device 800 is visually recognized as if it is a member for illuminating the outer rail 62. be able to. As a result, the utility value of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600 can be enhanced, and the appearance of the game board 13 and the operating unit 500 in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600 can be improved.

As an effective effect by performing the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 to the outer rail 62, a right-handed suggestion effect is assumed in which the light is visually recognized as if the light is moving along the path of a sphere. For example, the order of irradiating light from the rotation effect device 800 is the range E2 of the outer rail 62 with the LED on the right side, starting from the time of irradiating the range E1 of the outer rail 62 arranged above with the leftmost LED. The LED is set to the first light emission control mode in which the LED is turned off after a certain period of time (for example, 1 second) has passed from the irradiation timing, while the LED is changed to irradiate light to the ranges E3 and E4 in order. , It is possible to make it appear as if the light is moving to the right along the outer rail 62, whereby it is possible to notify the player that it is time to hit the right.

In this case, in order to produce a right-handed suggestion effect, the illumination boards are scattered on the game board 13 (see FIG. 18), or a figure or a picture for right-handed suggestion to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is designed. You can save the labor of doing it.

The right-handed suggestion effect is not limited to the case where the right-handed suggestion effect is executed only by the light emission effect by the rotation effect device 800, and various modes are exemplified. For example, in addition to the light emitting effect by the rotation effect device 800, the light emitting means arranged on the illuminated boards scattered on the game board 13 may be made to emit light, or in addition to the light emitting effect by the rotation effect device 800. , The third symbol display device 81 may display a figure or a picture for suggesting right-handed stroke.

Since the arrangement position of the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 is set on the back side of the upper connecting member 270 made of transparent resin, no nail is arranged in front of the rotation effect device 800. As a result, since it is not affected by the reflection by the nail, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 can be easily made visible to the player.

In addition, as will be described later, although the rotation effect device 800 can execute the rotation light emission effect in the overhang state of the internal operation unit 600, the evacuation device 800 has a different posture from the overhang state of the internal operation unit 600. It is used as a device capable of performing a right-handed suggestion effect by shining light on the outer rail 62 in the state. That is, the rotation effect device 800 can be used for different purposes.

The light effect executed by the rotation effect device 800 is not limited to the right-handed suggestion effect. For example, as a warning effect in which the central light emitting means 251b of the illumination substrate 251 as the effect device executes the light emission effect, a light effect such that the player can visually recognize the upward arrow may be executed.

As shown in FIG. 60, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged under the decorative portion 247. As a result, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 is improved by the amount not shielded by the decorative portion 247 as compared with the retracted state.

Further, as compared with the retracted state, it becomes easier to understand that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the rotation effect device 800 are integrally configured, and the vertical distance between the outer rail 62 and the rotation effect device 800 becomes wider.

Therefore, as the role of the rotation effect device 800, it can be easily recognized as a member that executes the light effect integrally with the decorative member 750 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700, instead of the member for illuminating the outer rail 62.

As a result, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the central decorative member 751 was a small effector that somehow could be visually recognized, but in the intermediate state, it became a large effector including not only the central decorative member 751 but also the rotation effect device 800. It is possible to give the player the illusion that it has changed.

As shown in FIG. 61, the rotation effect device 800 is in a posture in which the light irradiation direction LD81 faces the front side in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600. In this state, when the light is emitted from the rotation effect device 800 in the above-described first light emission control mode, the light can be visually recognized as moving to the right along the left-right direction. Also with this method, the player can be made to grasp as a right-handed suggestion effect.

In addition, unlike the arrangement of the specific winning opening 65a in the game area in the present embodiment (see FIG. 31), when the specific winning opening 65a is arranged on the lower right side of the game area, the rotation effect device 800 is arranged in the longitudinal direction. The posture of the rotation effect device 800 may be changed so that the tilted posture downwards to the right, and light may be irradiated in that posture in the above-described first light emission control mode. In this case, since the specific winning opening 65a is arranged at the destination where the light moves, it is possible for the player to easily understand that the ball should be launched toward the specific winning opening 65a.

The rotation effect device 800 is arranged so as to be able to perform one or more rotation operations in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600. The operating speed of the rotation operation is not particularly limited, but for example, when rotating at high speed, by finely controlling the blinking of each arrangement of the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800, a figure or a pattern is formed during rotation. May be configured to be visible (may be configured as a so-called versa writer device).

In FIG. 61, the fact that the elevating plate member 630 is arranged at the lower end of the vertical displacement is detected by the detection device when the detected unit 635 enters the detection groove of the detection device (not shown), thereby rotating. The voice lamp control device 113 (see FIG. 4) can determine that the rotation axis RJ1 of the member 810 is oriented in the front-rear direction.

With this detection as a flag, it may be controlled so that the rotation light emitting effect of the rotating member 810 can be executed. That is, the detection device that detects the moving end of the elevating plate member 630 can also be used as the detecting device that detects the startable timing of the rotational light emission effect of the rotating member 810.

FIG. 62 is a front view of the operating unit 500. In FIG. 62, for convenience of explanation, the outer shapes of the outer rail 62, the decorative portion 247 of the central configuration unit 240, and the illuminated substrate 251 are schematically shown, and the insides of the decorative portion 247 and the illuminated substrate 251 are painted white. It is illustrated in the state of being. In FIG. 62, the outline of the afterimage in the state where the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is rotating at high speed in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 is illustrated by an imaginary line.

The speed of high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810 is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the back side is difficult to see due to the afterimage, or the rotation speed may be such that the configuration on the back side can be visually recognized through the position where the rotating member 810 is not arranged, although the afterimage is generated.

In FIG. 62, as a light effect (rotational light emission effect) of the rotation effect device 800, the rotating member 810 is rotated at a rotation speed so that the configuration on the back side is difficult to see due to the afterimage, and is controlled to be visible during rotation. An example of a figure (a large arrow pointing to the right) is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 62, in order to facilitate understanding, the possible arrangement of the rotating member 810 is shown with an angle shift of 45 degrees, but in reality, only an afterimage can be seen, and the outer shape of the rotating member 810 is clarified. It rotates at a rotation speed that makes it difficult to see. By making the figure visible as shown in FIG. 62, the player can be notified (it is possible to grasp that it is the timing to hit right).

A specific method of implementing the rotary light emission effect will be described. Inside the rotating member 810, a plurality of LEDs arranged so as to allow light to travel toward the front side via the arch-shaped transmitting member 814 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810. Therefore, the diameter of the locus (circular path) in which the LED moves when the rotating member 810 is rotated around the rotating shaft RJ1 differs depending on the distance from the rotating shaft RJ1.

In FIG. 62, each of the arrangements of the moving LEDs accompanying the high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810 is inside or outside the figure to be displayed (in FIG. 62, the arrow pointing to the right). By switching the LED on and off, the afterimage of the light visually recognized through the arch-shaped transmitting member 814 is integrally visually recognized, so that the player can visually recognize a specific figure (in FIG. 62, an arrow pointing to the right). ..

Since the displayed figure can be changed in various ways by switching the on / off control timing of each LED in response to the rotation of the rotating member 810, the degree of freedom in producing a light emitting effect using the rotating member 810 is improved. be able to.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, the rotation effect device 800 can be used to execute a notification effect (right-handed suggestion effect) for the same purpose in various modes. That is, in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, it can be executed in a mode of irradiating the outer rail 62 with light, and in the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600, it is executed in both a mode in which the rotation effect device 800 is not rotated or a mode in which the rotation effect device 800 is rotated. can do.

Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the effect as compared with the case where the variation of the notification effect is small (for example, one). As a result, it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the right-handed suggestion notification effect has been described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and various effects are exemplified. For example, it may be a notification effect that suggests that the direction of the light and the direction of the arrow are switched alternately left and right to switch the firing of the sphere alternately left and right, or the direction of the left and the direction of the arrow are set to the left to hit left. A notification effect suggesting that the device should be returned may be performed.

Further, for example, by performing the light emitting effect so as to display the arc shape concentric with the outer rail 62 during the high-speed rotation in the rotational light emitting effect in the overhanging state, the outer rail 62 is similarly to the rotation effect device 800 in the retracted state. It is possible to continue the light emitting effect according to the shape of the above even in the overhanging state. As a result, it is possible to make the light emission effect consistent.

As shown in FIG. 62, the rotation effect device 800 is capable of rotating at high speed in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, but the rotation light emission effect is based on the premise that the rotation axis of the rotation effect device 800 is maintained. Since it is designed, the present embodiment employs a configuration in which the rotation effect device 800 is supported so as not to be displaced by a load generated in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis due to high-speed rotation.

First, the regulation of the displacement of the rotation effect device 800 in the left-right direction will be described. The light emitting operation effect unit 700 is held by connecting the connected holes 764 of the intermediate connecting member 760 to the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680, and the lower right of the pair of left and right connected holes 764. Only one is formed as a substantially circular support hole 764b instead of an elongated hole, and the other is formed as an elongated hole 764a.

Here, by making the connected hole 764 to which the fastening portion 682 is connected a long hole 764a, it is possible to allow the vertical displacement members 680 on both the left and right sides when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is displaced in the vertical direction. Can be done (see FIG. 39). On the other hand, if only the elongated holes 764a are configured, the rotation effect device 800 may be misaligned in the left-right direction when the rotation effect device 800 rotates at high speed.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by making at least one hole a support hole 764b, the movement of the fastening portion 682 in the left-right direction can be restricted by the support hole 764b. Even if the device 800 rotates at high speed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the rotation effect device 800 in the left-right direction.

63 (a) to 63 (c) are schematic front views of the fastening portion 682 of the displacement member 680, the elongated hole 764a of the connected hole 764, and the support hole 764b. In FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c), the longitudinal direction (horizontal width direction) of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is schematically illustrated as a schematic straight line 700L.

That is, FIG. 63 (a) illustrates a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is maintained in a horizontal posture because the schematic straight line 700L is arranged along the left-right direction, and FIG. 63 (b) shows a schematic. Since the straight line 700L is tilted to the upper left, the state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted is shown at the maximum allowable tilt angle. In FIG. 63 (c), the schematic straight line 700L is tilted to the upper right. Therefore, the state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted is shown at the maximum allowable tilt angle. The state shown in FIG. 63A corresponds to the state shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, and the state shown in FIG. 63C corresponds to the state shown in FIG. 39.

As shown in FIGS. 63 (a) to 63 (c), the inclination of the schematic straight line 700L is caused by the rotational displacement with the support hole 764b as a fulcrum. FIG. 63 (b) shows a position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front-rear ring member 689 abuts on the left end portion of the elongated hole 764a arranged in the upper left of the drawing. Rotation (corresponding to 700) (rotation in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front) is allowed.

FIG. 63 (c) shows a position where the cylindrical portion 689b1 of the front-rear ring member 689 abuts on the right end portion of the elongated hole 764a arranged in the upper right of the drawing. Rotation (corresponding to 700) (rotation in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front) is allowed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, unlike the case where the support holes 764b are adopted at a plurality of positions, it is possible to allow the displacement in the straight line UD71 direction along the vertical direction of the fastening portions 682 arranged on the left and right. Therefore, in a configuration in which the ascending / descending operation of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is executed by simultaneously driving the drive motors 648 arranged on the left and right sides, the operation timings of the drive motors 648 are deviated and the rotation speed varies. Can be tolerated.

The rotation of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b moves up and down when the opening direction of the support hole 764b is the front-rear direction (retracted state or intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600) as shown in FIG. It is allowed as a displacement in the moving direction of the plate member 630 (direction along the straight line UD71, vertical direction).

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted and displaced so that the opening direction of the support hole 764b is substantially the vertical direction (in the present embodiment, the angle with respect to the vertical direction is 5 degrees, that is, the internal operation. In the overhanged state of the unit 600), the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is a direction along a plane substantially orthogonal to the straight line UD71 (in the present embodiment, the angle with respect to the front-rear direction is (Direction along a plane of 5 degrees), and intersects the straight line UD71 at a substantially right angle.

The elevating plate member 630 is guided so as to be displaced in the straight line UD71 direction by the elongated hole 612 (see FIG. 49), while the displacement in the front-rear direction is regulated, so that the displacement in the front-rear direction of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is suppressed. Has been done. Therefore, when the rotation direction of the schematic straight line 700L starting from the support hole 764b is along a plane substantially orthogonal to the straight line UD71, the allowable rotation width of the schematic straight line 700L is suppressed.

That is, even under the condition that the elongated hole 764a is formed, it is possible to suppress the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 with respect to the elevating plate member 630 in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600.

In this case, as described above, by controlling the rotation light emitting effect in which the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed to be executed in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the arrangement of the rotating shaft RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is rotated light emitting. It is possible to prevent the displacement during the production. As a result, it is possible to omit the arrangement of another member for fixing the arrangement of the rotation shaft RJ1 of the rotation member 810.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the support hole 764b is arranged on the opposite side of the rotating member 810 (rear side in the state of FIG. 62), it is compared with the case where the support hole 764b is arranged on the side close to the rotating member 810. Therefore, it is possible to easily limit the misalignment caused by the rotation of the rotating member 810 (the misalignment caused on the front side of the light emitting operation effect unit 700).

When the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted and displaced, a load is generated in the direction away from the displacement member 680 with respect to the intermediate connecting member 760 (the direction in which the fastening portion 682 (see FIG. 50) projects) due to the load in the rotational direction (FIG. 53). Therefore, without countermeasures, the fastening portion 682 may be overloaded and damaged.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by setting the posture in which the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is slightly tilted (see FIG. 55) as the initial posture, the intermediate connecting member 760 is moved to the lower edge side of the displacement member 680 before the tilt displacement. It is urged in the approaching direction. That is, since the intermediate connecting member 760 is arranged close to the displacement member 680 on the side close to the tubular portion 684 (see FIG. 50 (a)) as the rotation axis of the displacement member 680, the displacement member is arranged with respect to the intermediate connecting member 760. The load generated in the direction away from the 680 can be easily generated as the load in the rotational direction of the displacement member 680, and the load applied to the fastening portion 682 can be reduced.

Next, regulation of vertical displacement of the rotation effect device 800 will be described. In the present embodiment, the vertical displacement of the contact plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 can be regulated by the resistance generator 650, and the regulation can be enforced in the overhanged state of the internal operation unit 600. Will be done.

64 to 66 are cross-sectional views of the operating unit 500 along the LXIV-LXIV line of FIG. 36. The LXIV-LXIV line is set as a line passing through the center of the plate thickness of the contacted plate 638 (see FIG. 49) of the elevating plate member 630. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled state are shown in FIGS. 64 to 66.

FIG. 64 shows the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, FIG. 65 shows the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIG. 66 shows the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600.

Further, in FIGS. 64 to 66, the state in which the solenoid 651 is not energized and the solenoid 651 is not excited is shown. In addition, in FIG. 65, for reference, a state in which the solenoid 651 is energized and the solenoid 651 is excited is partially cut out and shown.

As shown in FIGS. 64 and 66, when the solenoid 651 is not excited, the front-rear displacement member 653 of the resistance generator 650 is located on the front side and enters the moving path of the contacted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630. ..

The upper and lower side surfaces of the contacted plate 638 and the upper and lower side surfaces of the front-rear displacement member 653 are formed in a plane shape orthogonal to the vertical direction. Thereby, the moving direction (vertical direction) of the contacted plate 638 can be matched with the direction of the load received by the contacted plate 638 from the upper and lower side surfaces of the front-rear displacement member 653 in the moving direction.

Therefore, since the load applied to the front-rear displacement member 653 from the contacted plate 638 does not have a component toward the rear, it is possible to prevent the front-rear displacement member 653 from being pushed out to the back surface side. Therefore, the state in which the front-rear displacement member 653 is located on the front side is maintained.

In the state shown in FIG. 64, the front-rear displacement member 653 comes into contact with the contacted plate 638 in the vertical direction, and functions to prevent the downward displacement of the contacted plate 638. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the elevating plate member 630 can be prevented from being displaced downward by its own weight by the front-rear displacement member 653, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the retracted state.

In this embodiment, since the coil spring SP1 (see FIG. 47) exerts an upward urging force on the elevating plate member 630, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 is applied while the internal operation unit 600 is retracted. By designing the internal operation unit 600 to be sufficiently large in size to maintain it, it is possible to maintain the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state without operating the front-rear displacement member 653.

On the other hand, in this case, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 becomes large, and the driving force generated in the drive motor 648 for downward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 becomes large. Therefore, the drive motor 648 can be increased in size. May be needed. On the other hand, by adopting a configuration in which the internal operation unit 600 is maintained in the retracted state by the front-rear displacement member 653 as in the present embodiment, the urging force of the coil spring SP1 can be reduced as an auxiliary one. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the size of the drive motor 648.

In the state shown in FIG. 66, the front-rear displacement member 653 comes into contact with the contacted plate 638 in the vertical direction, and functions to prevent the ascending displacement of the contacted plate 638. That is, even if the drive motor 648 is not energized, the elevating plate member 630 can be prevented from being displaced upward by the front-rear displacement member 653, so that the internal operation unit 600 can be maintained in the overhanged state.

As the load for ascending and displacing the elevating plate member 630, a load due to inertia during the rotation light emission effect of the rotation effect device 800 (see FIG. 62) is assumed. That is, when the rotation effect device 800 rotates at high speed, the rotation effect device 800 may be displaced in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis, but the vertical displacement can be prevented by the front-rear displacement member 653.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the front-rear displacement member 653 not only lowers the elevating plate member 630 in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, but also ascends the elevating plate member 630 in the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600. Can also be prevented.

In the state shown in FIG. 65, the elevating plate member 630 is downwardly displaced in a state where the solenoid 651 is energized and excited (see the cutout range in FIG. 65), and then the solenoid 651 is de-energized. Corresponds to the state of.

That is, in the present embodiment, when the solenoid 651 is excited, the front-rear displacement member 653 retracts from the displacement locus of the contacted plate 638, so that the elevating plate member 630 can be displaced up and down. Even if the solenoid 651 is in a non-excited state during the vertical displacement of the plate member 630, the vertical displacement of the lifting plate member 630 is not immediately regulated, and the contacted plate 638 is in front of the front-rear displacement member 653. The vertical displacement can be continued while sliding on the side surface.

In other words, as the mode of the load that the elevating plate member 630 receives during the vertical displacement, the front-rear displacement member 653 does not come into contact with the contacted plate 638, so that the load from the front-rear displacement member 653 is not received, and the front-rear displacement member. It is possible to configure a mode in which frictional force is received by contacting with 653, and these can be switched depending on whether or not the solenoid 651 is energized.

The shape of the front side surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 that comes into contact with the contacted plate 638 is not limited in any way, but in the present embodiment, the planar shape that is orthogonal to the front-rear direction over the pair of upper and lower guide protrusions 614. The shape of the curved surface is curved so as to escape from the contacted plate 638 on the upper and lower outer sides of the guide protrusion 614.

As a result, the vertical width of the contact surface with the contacted plate 638 having a planar shape whose back surface side surface is orthogonal to the front-rear direction can be widened, and the contact area can be secured. The frictional force received by the elevating plate member 630 can be increased, and the degree of braking of the elevating plate member 630 can be increased in both the vertical and vertical directions.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the elevating plate member 630 in the vertical displacement can be braked (or stopped) by the front-rear displacement member 653. That is, the front-rear displacement member 653 is for maintaining the arrangement of the elevating plate member 630 at the upper and lower ends (the retracted state and the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600) and for braking the elevating plate member 630 during displacement. It can also be used as a member.

When the driving force is transmitted to the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 via the transmission gear 649 meshed with each other, as described above, the rack gear portion 634 of the elevating plate member 630 is urged rearward by its own weight. As a result, the meshing state of the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 is optimized, and the transmission efficiency of the driving force is improved.

On the other hand, when braking the elevating plate member 630, the load applied from the front-rear displacement member 653 to the contacted plate 638 is a load toward the front side, and acts to separate the rack gear 634 from the transmission gear 649.

Therefore, when the front-rear displacement member 653 comes into contact with the contact plate 638, not only the effect of deceleration due to being braked by the frictional force generated at the contact position but also the meshing state of the rack gear 634 and the transmission gear 649 is exhibited. The effect of deceleration can be produced by making it worse (lowering the degree of meshing and making the transmission efficiency of the driving force worse). As a result, the elevating plate member 630 can be efficiently braked (decelerated).

An example of the energization switching control of the solenoid 651 will be described. The description will be described with reference to the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. First, the solenoid 651 is energized before the drive motor 648 is started to be driven, and the front-rear displacement member 653 is retracted from the displacement locus of the contacted plate 638.

As a result, the elevating plate member 630 can be displaced in the vertical direction, so that the drive motor 648 is started to be driven and the internal operation unit 600 is displaced downward toward the overhanging state. By releasing the energization of the solenoid 651 in the state before the overhang state (for example, the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the front-rear displacement member 653 is pressed against the abutted plate 638 (see FIG. 65). ), The lifting plate member 630 can be braked by the frictional force.

When the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 is reached in this state, the contacted plate 638 is arranged below the displacement locus of the front-rear displacement member 653, so that the front-rear displacement member 653 is fronted by the return spring of the solenoid 651. Displace to the side position (see FIG. 66).

Therefore, the action given to the contacted plate 638 by the front-rear displacement member 653 can be smoothly changed from braking to position regulation without switching whether or not the solenoid 651 is energized.

On the other hand, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced ascending from the overhanging state, the front-rear displacement member 653 is abutted plate by maintaining the energization of the solenoid 651 during the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630. It is possible to maintain a state in which it does not come into contact with 638. As a result, frictional resistance between the front-rear displacement member 653 and the contacted plate 638 can be prevented from being generated, so that the driving force required for the ascending displacement of the elevating plate member 630 can be reduced, and the driving force can be reduced. The size of the motor 648 can be reduced.

It will be described that the mode of the rotation operation of the rotation effect device 800 changes in response to the change of the state of the internal operation unit 600. In the present embodiment, the posture of the rotation effect device 800 changes as the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 changes in the forward rotation direction or the backflip direction, but the rotation operation (rotation angle) allowed for each posture is determined. Change.

67 to 69 are cross-sectional views of the game board 13 and the operation unit 500 in the LXVII-LXVII line of FIG. 36. The LXVII-LXVII line corresponds to a line passing through the center of the width dimension of the tubular member 695 (see FIG. 37) of the rotary posture assisting member 690. Although the game board 13 is not shown in FIG. 36, cross-sectional views of the game board 13 in the assembled state are shown in FIGS. 67 to 69.

FIG. 67 shows the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600, and FIGS. 68 (a) and 68 (b) show an intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600. FIGS. 69 (a) and 69 (b). ) Shows the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. That is, in FIGS. 67 to 69, how the internal operation unit 600 changes from the overhanging state to the retracted state through the intermediate state is illustrated in chronological order.

Note that FIGS. 68 (a) and 69 (a) show the rotating member 810 in an appropriate posture in which the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 is along the left-right direction, and FIGS. 68 (b) and 69 (b) show rotation. The state in which the front end portion of the member 810 in the drawing reaches the permissible end of movement toward the back surface is shown.

That is, in FIG. 68 (b), a state in which the end portion of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 is shown (in FIG. 68 (b), it is shown as non-contacting). In FIG. 69 (b), the end portion of the rotating member 810 is in contact with the tubular member 695 of the rotating posture assisting member 690, which is in contact with the right side of the illustrated cross section (the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 68 (b)). The state of contact is shown (in FIG. 69 (b), it is shown as non-contact, but it is in contact on the right side of the illustrated cross section (on the front side of the paper surface in FIG. 69 (b))). ..

In the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 shown in FIG. 67, the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 makes one or more turns (360 degrees or more) in the rotation direction RD1 about the rotation axis RJ1 as an example of the rotation light emission effect. It is configured to enable the rotation operation of. That is, the decorative portion 247 or the like arranged on the center frame 86 is arranged at a position where it does not enter the operation locus of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800.

In FIG. 68, since the bottom wall portion 511 of the back case 510 is arranged on the back side of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotating effect device 800 is determined by the rotating member 810. It is limited to the angle until it is displaced in the rotation direction RD1 and comes into contact with the rear case 510 (see FIG. 68 (b)).

Basically, the posture of the rotating member 810 is controlled so that the longitudinal direction of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is along the left-right direction before the state changes from the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 to the intermediate state. (Controlled to an appropriate posture), and then controlled to change the state toward the intermediate state, the possibility of collision between the rotating member 810 and the bottom wall portion 511 is low.

In the present embodiment, even if the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 collides with the bottom wall portion 511 due to erroneous control, the rotating member 810 bottoms above the upper edge of the opening 511a of the bottom wall portion 511. Since it is arranged so as to collide with the wall portion 511, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the rotating member 810 collides with the third symbol display device 81.

In FIG. 69, since the tubular member 695 of the rotation posture assisting member 690 is arranged on the back surface side of the rotation member 810 of the rotation effect device 800, the rotatable angle of the rotation member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is determined by the rotation member. The angle is limited to the angle at which the 810 is displaced in the rotation direction RD1 and comes into contact with the tubular member 695. That is, the rotatable angle of the rotating member 810 of the rotation effect device 800 is smaller in the retracted state than in the intermediate state (see FIG. 68 (b)) (see FIG. 69 (b)).

In the present embodiment, when the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced until it comes into contact with the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operating unit 600, the state change continues as it is until the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600. However, in the process of the state change (upward displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700), the rotating member 810 abuts on the tubular member 695 and is pushed forward, so that the posture difference from the proper posture of the rotating member 810 is increased. The posture of the rotating member 810 is modified so as to be smaller.

Since the rotating member 810 has a symmetrical shape in a proper posture (see FIG. 61) and the tubular member 695 is arranged in a symmetrical position, it is assumed that the posture difference of the rotating member 810 occurs between the left and right sides. However, the posture of the rotating member 810 is corrected so that the posture difference from the proper posture of the rotating member 810 is small (regardless of the rotation direction around the rotating shaft RJ1).

Since the rotating member 810 is rotating around the rotating shaft RJ1, the rotating member 810 is displaced to the back side and is in contact with the tubular member 695 (one side on the left and right, see FIG. 69) on the opposite side (left and right, etc.). On the side), the rotating member 810 comes close to the base plate 60. If the posture deviation from the proper posture is large, the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60 may rub against each other, causing the rotating member 810 to wear or be damaged by a collision.

On the other hand, as described above, when the tubular member 695 functions, the posture of the rotating member 810 changes to the side where the internal operating unit 600 returns to the proper posture in the process of changing the state toward the retracted state. The rotating members 810 on the left and right sides can be displaced in a direction away from the base plate 60. As a result, contact between the rotating member 810 and the base plate 60 can be avoided.

As described above, the tubular member 695 is a member that abuts on the rotating member 810 and functions to push the rotating member 810 toward the front side, and is a perfect circle that can be rolled in order to avoid wear of the rotating member 810. It is formed in a tubular shape. That is, the tubular member 695 rotates when it comes into contact with the rotating member 810 so as not to leave scratches on the rotating member 810.

In order to maintain this function, it is preferable to omit the decorative shape as much as possible. However, when the tubular member 695 is visually recognized by the player, the shape is too simple when viewed at the same time as other decorative parts, giving a sense of discomfort. there is a possibility.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the tubular member 695 is arranged on the retracted position side (upper side and back side) of the arrangement of the rotating member 810 in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the tubular member 695 It is possible to lower the attention to.

Further, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the tubular member 695 is designed to be arranged on the back side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 36), so that the rotating member 810 provides visibility of the tubular member 695. Can be lowered.

Therefore, while the shape of the tubular member 695 is designed to be the optimum shape for avoiding wear of the rotating member 810, the tubular member 695 can be seen by the player by reducing the visibility of the tubular member 695. The sex can be lowered, and the game can be continued without a sense of discomfort.

The light effect enabled by the posture change allowed in the rotating member 810 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 is applied to the outer rail 62, so that the outer rail 62 can emit light.

In addition to this, by changing the posture of the rotating member 810 around the rotating shaft RJ1, one of the rotating tip portions of the rotating member 810 can be displaced to the front side. For example, in FIG. 69 (b), since the rotating tip portion on the back side (left side) of the paper surface can be moved toward the front side, the left side of the outer rail 62 can be made to emit light brighter and the right side can be made to emit light slightly darker. Further, if the direction of the posture change of the rotating member 810 is reversed, the difference between the left and right light and dark can be reversed.

As a result, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the light emitting intensity of the outer rail 62 for each part. For example, the light emission intensity of the light irradiation from the rotating member 810 was not changed, but the rotating member 810 was repeatedly changed in posture so as to reciprocate in the rotation direction of the center of the rotation axis RJ1 to irradiate the left and right sides of the outer rail 62. The apparent brightness of the light can be switched alternately left and right.

The light effect enabled by the posture change allowed in the rotating member 810 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 will be described. As described above, in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600, the posture of the rotating member 810 can be changed at an angle larger than the posture change angle in the retracted state. Therefore, the light emitted from the rotation effect device 800 is applied to the outer rail 62, and the arrival position of the light in the effect of causing the outer rail 62 to emit light can be positioned closer to the front side.

As a result, even if the rotating member 810 provided with the light emitting means such as an LED moves away from the outer rail 62, the position where the light is reflected by the outer rail 62 is changed to the front side (player side), so that the outer rail 62 can be used. Changes in the intensity of the emitted and reflected light can be made inconspicuous to the player.

Further, the reachable range of the light is not limited to the outer rail 62, and the light is also applied to a portion of the upper connecting member 270 such as the sixth overhanging portion 277 (see FIG. 26) which is arranged away from the outer rail 62. Can be reached.

By swinging the rotating member 810 around the rotating shaft RJ1 arranged at the center position on the left and right, the longitudinal end portions arranged on the left and right outer sides can be arranged forward one side at a time, so that the base plate 60 can be arranged forward. It is possible to assist the light effect in a range (left and right outer positions) that is difficult to cover with the illuminated substrate 251 designed to be arranged at the center position on the left and right from the viewpoint of strength.

As a result, even when the arrangement of the illumination board 251 is limited, the effect performance of the light effect in the place where the illumination board 251 is not arranged can be obtained by the rotation effect device 800 arranged in the operation unit 500. It can be improved by the light emission effect.

Next, the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 70. In the first embodiment, the case where the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging the game ball from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 has been described. However, in the distribution unit 3980 of the third embodiment, the discharge path of the ball is formed on the front side of the bulging portion 3982 forming the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 70 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 3980 according to the third embodiment, and FIG. 70 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 3980. As shown in FIGS. 70 (a) and 70 (b), the distribution unit 3980 is configured so that the sphere can be discharged to the front side on the upstream side of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the front base 3891 of the distribution unit 3980 has a pair of openings 3982k formed through the bulging portion 982 and a ball that has passed through the openings 3892k and is discharged to the front side of the bulging portion 982 in the left direction. It is provided with a discharge gutter (3982 liters) that allows the flow down and discharges to the back side.

The opening 3892k is arranged on the front side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed through a rectangular shape having a size that allows a ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through. ..

The left and right long portions of the discharge gutter 3982l are inclined downward to the left, and the front and rear long portions formed at the left end thereof are inclined downward to the rear. Therefore, the ball that has passed through the opening 3982k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and got on the discharge gutter 3982l is flowed to the left along the discharge gutter 3982l, and the flow direction is switched to the rear side at the left end position. It is swept backwards.

In the present embodiment, the discharge gutter 3982l is configured to receive balls on both sides of the pair of openings 3892k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the component cost. A gutter 3982 liter may be provided. In this case, the discharge gutter 3982l arranged on the front side of the left opening 3982k is inclined downward to the left, and the discharge gutter 3982l arranged on the front side of the right opening 3892k is lowered toward the right. By configuring it to be inclined, the length of the discharge gutter 3982l alone can be shortened.

The appearance of the sphere that has passed through the inflow port 982d will be described. The front base 3981 is made of a colored translucent (blue in this embodiment) resin material, and a sphere that passes through the inflow port 982d and flows down the back side of the bulge 982 is visually recognized through the bulge 982. can do.

On the other hand, since the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 through which the ball flows down are formed so as to extend to the rear of the electric accessory 140a, the electric accessory 140a serves as a shield in the range behind the electric accessory 140a. It acts and the visibility of the sphere deteriorates.

If the difference in whether or not the ball is detected by the detection device SE3 occurs in the flow direction of the ball in the range behind the electric accessory 140a, it is necessary to pay attention to the ball in the range with poor visibility, and the player needs to pay attention to the ball. May give a feeling of fatigue.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the ball deviating from the path toward the detection device SE3 flows to the front side through the opening 3892k, not only the ball approaches from the player's point of view, but also the flow to the front side is electric. Since it occurs above the range hidden by the accessory 140a, it is possible to ensure the visibility of the sphere that has passed through the inflow port 982d and that flows in the direction deviating from the detection device SE3.

Thereby, when the lottery of the special symbol does not occur even though the ball passes through the inflow port 982d, it can be easily grasped that the result is that the ball deviates from the detection device SE3.

Other modifications in shape of the distribution unit 3980 will be described. In the present embodiment, instead of forming the opening 3892k to secure the discharge path of the sphere, in the back base 3985, the formation of the openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) is omitted from the back base 985 in the first embodiment. Correspondingly, the left-right width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is shortened.

As a result, the left-right width of the distribution unit 3980 can be shortened, so that the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 can be reduced, so that the thick portion (nails) of the base plate 60 can be reduced. The area of the plantable part) can be secured. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the nails.

Further, since the nails can be arranged in the vicinity of the electric accessory 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a can be improved.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 71. In the first embodiment, the case where the recesses 982e, 982f, 982g for discharging the game ball from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 are arranged on the left and right sides of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 has been described. However, in the distribution unit 4980 of the fourth embodiment, the discharge path of the sphere is formed on the rear side of the back surface base 4985 which forms the back side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 71 (a) is a front view of the distribution unit 4980 according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 71 (b) is a rear view of the distribution unit 4980. As shown in FIGS. 71 (a) and 71 (b), the distribution unit 4980 is configured so that the sphere can be discharged to the back side on the upstream side of the openings 985e and 985f.

That is, the back base 4985 of the distribution unit 4980 has an opening 4985k formed through a pair of left and right, and a ball that has passed through the opening 4985k and is discharged to the back side of the back base 4985 to flow down to the left side to the back side. It is provided with 4985 liters of a discharge gutter for discharging.

The opening 4985k is arranged on the back side of the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2, and is formed through a rectangular shape having a size that allows a ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 to pass through. ..

In the discharge gutter 4985l, the long portion on the left and right is inclined downward to the left, and the long portion before and after formed at the left end thereof is inclined downward toward the rear. Therefore, the ball passing through the opening 4985k from the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 and riding on the discharge gutter 4985l is flowed to the left along the discharge gutter 4985l, and the flow direction is switched to the rear side at the left end position. It is swept backwards.

The drain gutter 4985l is arranged on the back side of the back base 4985 and is arranged away from the player, but the front base 981 and the back base 4985 arranged on the front side thereof are formed of a translucent resin material. Therefore, the player can visually recognize the ball rolling the discharge gutter 4985 l and the discharge gutter 4985 l through the front base 981 and the back base 4985.

In the present embodiment, the discharge gutter 4985l is configured to receive balls on both sides of the pair of openings 4985k, thereby reducing the number of parts and reducing the component cost. However, the discharge gutters are discharged to each opening 4985k. A gutter of 4985 liters may be provided. In this case, the balls can be discharged by flowing the balls from each opening 4985 l at least to the rear side, so that it is not necessary to form the discharge gutter 4985 l long to the left and right. Thereby, the shape of the discharge gutter 4985 l can be simplified.

According to the configuration of the present embodiment in which the discharge gutter 4985 l is formed on the back surface side, it is possible to prevent the discharge gutter 4985 l from being conspicuous. Therefore, the design of the base plate 60 in the vicinity of the through hole 60a of the base plate 60 (see FIG. 5) It is possible to avoid the influence of 4985 l of the discharge gutter. Therefore, the degree of freedom in designing the decorative pattern of the base plate 60 can be improved.

Other ideas for the shape of the distribution unit 4980 will be described. In the present embodiment, instead of forming the opening 4985k to secure the discharge path of the sphere, in the back base 4985, the formation of the openings 985b and 985c (see FIG. 8) is omitted from the back base 985 in the first embodiment. Correspondingly, the left-right width near the lower end of the bulging portion 982 is shortened.

As a result, the left-right width of the distribution unit 4980 can be shortened, so that the shape of the through hole 60a (see FIG. 5) of the base plate 60 can be reduced, so that the thick portion (nails) of the base plate 60 can be reduced. The area of the plantable part) can be secured. This makes it possible to improve the degree of freedom in arranging the nails.

Further, since the nails can be arranged in the vicinity of the electric accessory 140a, the degree of freedom in arranging the nails for guiding the ball to the electric accessory 140a can be improved.

According to the configuration in which the opening 4985k is formed on the back side, the vertical arrangement of the opening 4985k is arbitrarily designed regardless of the arrangement of the electric accessory 140a, as compared with the configuration in which the opening is formed on the front side (see FIG. 70). It will be possible. Therefore, the probability that the ball flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 will be detected by the detection device SE3 (passing through the detection hole SE1a) without deviating can be adjusted from the shape.

For example, when the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be the same width as the diameter of the sphere, most of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 do not pass through the opening 4985k, and the detection device SE3 detects. It will pass through the hole SE1a.

On the other hand, when the vertical width of the opening 4985k is designed to be 1.5 times the diameter of the sphere, about 20% of the spheres flowing down the first passage TR1 or the second passage TR2 pass through the opening 4985k, and the rest. About 80% of the above passes through the detection hole SE1a of the detection device SE3. That is, the probability of being detected by the detection device SE3 can be adjusted by arbitrarily designing the vertical width of the opening 4985k.

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 and 73. In the second embodiment, the case where the sphere reaching the upper connecting member 270 is smoothly guided to the left and right has been described, but in the upper connecting member 5270 of the fifth embodiment, the smooth guidance of the sphere in the left-right direction is suppressed. Various ingenuity is given. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 72 is a partially enlarged front view of the game board 13 according to the fifth embodiment, and FIG. 73 is a partial cross-sectional view of the game board 13 on the line LXXIII-LXXIII of FIG. 72.

As shown in FIG. 72, the upper component member 5241 constituting the center frame 86 includes left and right projecting portions 5246 formed so as to project from the strip-shaped frame portion 245 toward the second overhanging portion 5273. The second overhanging portion 5273 includes a deceleration projecting portion 5273a projecting from the lower end portion toward the left and right positions of the deceleration projecting portion 5246.

According to the present embodiment, a ball flowing down between a pair of left and right first overhanging portions 272 and between the first overhanging portion 272 and the second overhanging portion 5273 reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 and is left and right. When it rolls to, it flows down so as to be ejected from the left and right projecting portions 5246 to the left and right outside, collides with the deceleration projecting portion 5273a, and is decelerated.

That is, the momentum of launch is so great that it reaches between the pair of left and right first overhangs 272 and between the first overhang 272 and the second overhang 5273, and the sphere has a large kinetic energy. The speed can be reduced by collision with the deceleration projecting portion 5273a.

The overlapping width (vertical dimension) related to the contact of the ball with the deceleration projecting portion 5273a differs depending on the magnitude of the velocity of the ball when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246. That is, the ball passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 at high speed abuts in a wide range with the deceleration projecting portion 5273a at a higher position, while the ball having a slow speed when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 is decelerated and projecting. It is displaced to a lower position than before it comes into contact with the portion 5273a, and is kept in contact with the deceleration protrusion portion 5273a to the extent that it rubs against it.

Therefore, when the speed when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 is high, a large deceleration action can be expected, while when the speed when passing through the left and right projecting portions 5246 is slow, the deceleration action is suppressed. It is possible to prevent the ball from staying.

According to the present embodiment, a ball that is launched along the launch path HL51 with a strong firing force and reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 on the upstream side (left and right inside) of the left and right projecting portions 5246 is in the process of rolling. While the deceleration action is generated by abutting on the deceleration projecting portion 5273a, the ball is launched along the launch path HL52 with a weak firing force and reaches the band-shaped frame portion 245 on the downstream side (left and right outside) of the left and right projecting portions 5246. Is configured so that the deceleration action by the deceleration protrusion 5273a does not occur.

That is, the ball launched with a strong firing force reaching the center of the left and right of the game area is decelerated by the deceleration projecting portion 5273a, and is launched with a weak firing force reaching the left and right outside (left side) of the game area. The ball is not decelerated by the deceleration projecting portion 5273a. As a result, it is possible to reduce the speed difference of the flow of the sphere (flow when passing through the lower end side of the strip-shaped frame portion 245) due to the magnitude of the firing force (the magnitude of the kinetic energy).

As shown in FIG. 73, an opening 5274a is formed through the upper surface of the third overhanging portion 5274 with a size that allows a sphere to pass through. The opening 5274a is formed with a left-right width of about the diameter of the sphere, and jointly forms a passage of the sphere with the recessed portion 5217a formed in such a manner that the plate-shaped portion 271 is cut out. The recessed portion 5217a makes it easier to guide the ball toward the opening 5274a.

A through-passage 5060d is formed through the base plate 60 in the front-rear direction as a passage for a ball that has entered the opening 5274a. On the back side of the base plate 60, a flow path component 5295 provided with a guide flow path 5295a that receives the ball that has passed through the gangway 5060d and guides the ball downward on the left and right sides is fastened and fixed.

The guide flow path 5295a is connected to the flow path rear component portion 266 (see FIG. 25) as a member for sending a sphere to the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263 so as to communicate the internal path. As a result, the path of the sphere can be configured so that the sphere that has flowed to the back surface side of the base plate 60 reappears on the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263.

When the ball rolling on the strip-shaped extension portion 263 (see FIG. 24) passes through the central rear inclined portion 263a and is discharged from the ball discharge hole 263c, the ball falls toward the first winning opening 64 (see FIG. 18). Due to such an arrangement relationship, the possibility that the ball rolling on the strip-shaped extension portion 263 will enter the first winning opening 64 is remarkably increased.

Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the sphere that has flowed to the back side of the base plate 60 through the opening 5274a. In addition, it is possible to increase the motivation of the player to adjust the firing force so that the ball passes through the opening 5274a.

The subsequent flow path of the sphere that has flowed to the back side is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, a through hole may be formed in the base plate 60 so as to return to the front side of the base plate 60 at the left and right outer positions of the flow path front component 265 (see FIG. 18), or the left component 450 or the right. The flow path may be extended downward so as to flow down behind the component member 470.

When the flow path extends downward so as to flow down behind the left component 450 and the right component 470, the flow path is at least a part of the outer dropout path FL2 (see FIG. 31) in front view. By arranging them so as to overlap each other, it is possible to make it appear as if the balls flowing down the back surface side of the base plate 60 flow down toward the first ball guide portion 457. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball flowing down the back surface side of the base plate 60.

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. In the second embodiment, the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13 has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13. .. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

74 and 75 are partial cross-sectional views of the pachinko machine 6010 according to the sixth embodiment in the line corresponding to the LV-LV line of FIG. 36. FIG. 74 shows a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, and FIG. 75 shows a state in which the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position.

As shown in FIGS. 74 and 75, the pachinko machine 6010 is provided with a front frame 6014 on the front side of the game board 13, and the first glass unit 6016a is in a state where the front frame 6014 is locked to the outer frame 11. It is configured to block the front side of the game area.

The front frame 6014 includes the above-mentioned first glass unit 6016a and a second glass unit 6016b which is arranged in an inclined posture so as to incline toward the front side and is arranged closer to the front side.

In the first glass unit 6016a, a plate-shaped glass portion is formed on the game area side with reference to the center frame 86, and an opening 6016c is formed through the first glass unit 6016a on the opposite side. That is, since the front surface of the center frame 86 of the first glass unit 6016a is open, the third symbol display device arranged inside the center frame 86 and the center frame 86 is arranged so that the glass unit 6016a does not block the view in the front view. The visibility of the display of 81 can be improved.

The second glass unit 6016b is fixed so as to be fitted inside the support portion 6014a forming the periphery of the front frame 6014. Since the second glass unit 6016b isolates the player from the operating unit 500, the situation where the player touches the operating unit 500 is avoided even when the opening 6016c is formed in the first glass unit 6016a. be able to.

The support portion 6014a is made of an impermeable resin material and a metal material, and functions to hide a configuration arranged on the back surface side thereof.

The light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is the same as the light emitting operation effect unit 700 described in the second embodiment, except that the arrangement is different. That is, the rotation effect device 800 is rotatably arranged in the light emitting operation effect unit 6700.

Inside the front frame 6014, the first elongated hole 6672, the second elongated hole 6673, and the curved elongated hole having the same shape as the first elongated hole 672, the second elongated hole 673, and the curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment The 6674 is formed in a state of being inclined by about 25 degrees in the forward rotation direction with respect to the posture in the second embodiment.

The change in the appearance of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 due to the change in the arrangement will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, the central decorative member 751 is barely visible, and the entire image of the rotating member 810 is blindfolded by the support portion 6014a of the front frame 6014. That is, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the upper end position, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is lowered.

On the other hand, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is downwardly displaced toward the diagonally rearward direction, the portion hidden by the support portion 6014a is arranged behind the second glass unit 6016b, and the entire image of the rotating member 810 can be visually recognized. Further, even when the rotating member 810 rotates at high speed around the rotating shaft RJ1 to execute the rotational light emitting effect, the player can visually recognize the rotating tip side of the rotating member 810. That is, when the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged at the lower end position, the visibility of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is improved.

As shown by an imaginary line in FIG. 75, the rotation locus of the rotating member 810 enters within the thickness dimension of the first glass unit 6014a, but an opening 6016c is formed at the entered position. , The contact between the first glass unit 6014a and the rotating member 810 is avoided. That is, the opening 6016c functions to improve the degree of freedom in arrangement of the rotating member 810 by avoiding contact with the rotating member 810.

In the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is arranged on the front side of the game board 13, while the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged on the back side of the game board 13. The operation mode of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is as described above in the second embodiment.

Therefore, according to the present embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 may be moved toward the lower end position or emit light as an effect operation in which the movable unit projects to the front side of the display area of the third symbol display device 81. The operation effect unit 700 may be in an overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600.

Further, the rotation light emission effect of the rotation effect device 800 may be executed by the rotation member 810 of the light emission operation effect unit 700, or may be executed by the rotation member 810 of the light emission operation effect unit 6700. As a result, the degree of freedom in setting the execution position of the rotary light emission effect can be improved, and the execution variation (either the light emission operation effect unit 700 or the light emission operation effect unit 6700 executes the rotary light emission effect or rotates alternately. It is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing (variations such as whether to execute a light emitting effect or to execute a rotating light emitting effect at the same time).

Although the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is also arranged in the rear case 510 has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 may not be arranged inside the rear case 510.

In this case, since the field of view is not obstructed by the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the upper edge portion of the third symbol display device 81 is pulled upward to display the third symbol display device 81. The area of the area can be increased. Further, since the front-rear width of the rear case 510 required for accommodating the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be shortened, the front-rear distance between the center frame 86 and the third symbol display device 81 can be shortened. The visibility of the display by the third symbol display device 81 can be improved.

Next, the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 76. In the second embodiment, the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided by the linear second elongated hole 673 and the curved elongated hole 674 formed to be curved, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 moves in parallel. Although the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is switched to the rotating state about the central axis J1 of the tubular portion 684 has been described, the guide portion 7673 of the seventh embodiment extends linearly along the vertical direction. It is formed in a ridge shape. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

76 (a) to 76 (c) are schematic side views of the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 that schematically show the guide portion 7673 and the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 in the seventh embodiment. FIG. 76 (a) shows the arrangement of the configuration at the height of the internal operation unit 600 in the retracted state, and FIG. 76 (b) shows the arrangement of the configuration at the height of the internal operation unit 600 in the intermediate state. In FIG. 76 (c), the arrangement of the configuration at the height of the internal operation unit 600 in the overhanging state is illustrated.

The arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the overhanging state is such that the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is displaced rearward, so that the overhanging of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment can be seen. It shifts backward from the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the state.

The guide portion 7673 is formed along the extending direction of the second elongated hole 673 described in the second embodiment, and is formed on the left and right inner side surfaces of the outer member 610 as a plate-shaped portion extending further downward. , The metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged so as to regulate the displacement in the front-rear direction. The L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed with a recessed portion 7674a having a width that allows the tubular portion 684 to be received from the lower end portion of the curved elongated hole 674 described in the second embodiment toward the rear.

The downward displacement of the displacement member 680 will be described. The displacement from FIG. 76 (a) to FIG. 76 (b) is a translation performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. In the displacement from FIG. 76 (b) to FIG. 76 (c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced around the tubular portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rotation direction.

At this time, the tubular portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in a manner of entering and retreating into the recessed portion 7674a because the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. That is, during the posture change of the displacement member 680, the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced while the tubular portion 684 is still displaced in the front-rear direction. be able to.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 77. In the second embodiment, the case where the second elongated hole 673 for guiding the metal rod-shaped member 686 is extended along the vertical direction has been described, but the second elongated hole 8673 of the eighth embodiment is oriented in the vertical direction. It is extended along the direction of inclination. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

77 (a) to 77 (c) schematically show the second elongated hole 8673, the curved elongated hole 8674, the third elongated hole 8675, the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b in the eighth embodiment. It is a schematic side view of the 2nd long hole 8673, the curved long hole 8674, the 3rd long hole 8675, the 1st long hole upper part 8672a and the 1st long hole lower part 8672b.

FIG. 77 (a) shows a state in which the metal rod-shaped member 686 and the tubular portion 684 are arranged at the upper end positions of the displacement range, and FIG. 77 (b) shows that the metal rod-shaped member 686 is curved with the second elongated hole 8673. The state where the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at the connecting position with the elongated hole 8674 is positioned, and FIG. 77 (c) shows the state where the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at the connecting position between the curved elongated hole 8674 and the third elongated hole 8675. Ru.

The first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the second elongated hole 8673 are extended in a direction of descending inclination toward the rear at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. A curved elongated hole 8674 is connected to the lower end of the second elongated hole 8673.

The curved elongated hole 8674 is curved along an arc centered on the central axis J81 of the tubular portion 684 in a state where the tubular portion 684 is arranged at a connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. It is extended in shape.

The upper end of the third elongated hole 8675 is connected to the lower end of the curved elongated hole 8674. The first elongated hole lower portion 8672b and the third elongated hole 8675 connected to the lower end portion of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a extend in a direction in which the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b and the third elongated hole 8675 are inclined downward at an inclination angle of about 70 degrees with respect to the front-rear direction. Will be done.

The metal rod-shaped member 686 is inserted through the front and rear elongated holes 636 of the elevating plate member 630, and the vertical position changes as the elevating plate member 630 moves in the vertical direction. The displacement of the displacement member 680 due to the change in the arrangement of the metal rod-shaped member 686 will be described.

The displacement from FIG. 77 (a) to FIG. 77 (b) is a translation performed while maintaining the posture of the displacement member 680. At this time, the displacement direction of the displacement member 680 is not the vertical direction but the direction having the components in the front-rear direction. From the player's point of view, the displacement member 680 seems to be retracted backward while being lowered, so that the size of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 becomes smaller as the light emitting operation effect unit 700 descends and appears. Can be shown for (moving away).

In the displacement from FIG. 77 (b) to FIG. 77 (c), the metal rod-shaped member 686 is rotationally displaced around the tubular portion 684, so that the displacement member 680 is tilted in the forward rotation direction. Along with this, the visible surface of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be switched. In the present embodiment, since the tilt angle is larger than that in the second embodiment, the player can visually recognize the back surface side of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 51).

At this time, the tubular portion 684 is displaced in the front-rear direction in a manner of entering and retreating into the recessed portion 7674a because the distance from the metal rod-shaped member 686 is maintained. That is, during the posture change of the displacement member 680, the arrangement of the tubular portion 684 is not maintained, and the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced while the tubular portion 684 is still displaced in the front-rear direction. be able to.

When the metal rod-shaped member 686 is further displaced downward from the state shown in FIG. 77 (c), the displacement member 680 is displaced forward along the third elongated hole 8675. Therefore, it is possible to make it appear to the player that the displacement member 680 is protruding forward while being lowered. At this time, the forward overhang can be emphasized by the amount that is once displaced rearward along the second elongated hole 8673.

In the present embodiment, the displacement resistance of the tubular portion 684 is increased in a state where the tubular portion 684 is arranged at the connecting position between the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a and the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b. .. That is, in FIG. 77 (b), the inner surface of the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b that abuts on the rear side portion of the tubular portion 684 is a friction between the other portion of the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b and the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a. It is made of a material with a large coefficient of friction compared to the coefficient.

As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the tubular portion 684 at the connecting position between the upper portion of the first elongated hole 8672a and the lower portion of the first elongated hole 8672b until the metal rod-shaped member 686 reaches the terminal position of the curved elongated hole 8674. ..

The method of maintaining the tubular portion 684 at the connecting position between the upper portion of the first elongated hole 8672a and the lower portion of the first elongated hole 8672b is not limited to adopting a material having a large coefficient of friction, and various aspects can be used. Illustrated. For example, the shape of the inner surface of the first elongated hole upper portion 8672a or the first elongated hole lower portion 8672b may be formed from a shape having a large friction coefficient (for example, a textured shape).

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 78. In the second embodiment, the case where the elongated hole 764a through which the fastening portion 682 is inserted is long in the left-right direction and short in the up-down direction has been described, but the large-diameter hole 9764a of the ninth embodiment has a cylindrical shape of the ring member 9689b with a flange. It is a circular hole with an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the portion 689b1. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

78 (a) and 78 (b) are partial cross-sectional views of the displacement member 9680 and the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 in the ninth embodiment in the line corresponding to the line corresponding to the line LXXVIIIa-LXXVIIIa in FIG. 37.

In FIG. 78 (a), the fastening portion 682 faces in a substantially front-rear direction (a direction in which the fastening portion 682 rises and inclines three degrees toward the front), and the upper edge portion of the large-diameter hole 9764a is supported in contact with the cylindrical portion 689b1. The state is illustrated. In FIG. 78 (b), the posture of the displacement member 9680 is switched to the posture in which the fastening portion 682 faces downward, and the ring member 9689b with a collar attached to the head of the fastening screw B91 fastened to the fastening portion 682 and the light emitting operation effect unit 9700. Is illustrated.

In the present embodiment, the plate-shaped ring member 689a sandwiching the large-diameter hole 9764a from both sides and the flanged ring member 9689b differ in the mode of contact with the light emitting operation effect unit 9700. That is, the plate-shaped ring member 689a comes into contact with the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 at the plate flat surface portion. On the other hand, the flanged ring member 9689b has an inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed 360 degrees from the tip of the flange portion toward the cylindrical portion 689b1 side, and is formed at the end portion of the large diameter hole 9764a over 360 degrees. The chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is brought into contact with the surface.

In the state shown in FIG. 78 (a) (a state corresponding to the retracted state or the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600), the fastening portion 682 is inclined in the backward tilting direction, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 moves backward. And comes into contact with the plate-shaped ring member 989a.

Since this contact is a contact on a flat surface, the sliding friction force with respect to the rotational displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 centered on the fastening portion 682 is reduced, and at least between the large diameter hole 9764a and the cylindrical portion 689b1. The light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be displaced by the amount of the gap. Therefore, the rotational displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be allowed.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 78 (b) (corresponding to the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600), the tip of the fastening portion 682 is directed downward, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 sinks downward and has a collar. It comes into contact with the ring member 9689b.

Since this contact is between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 formed over 360 degrees and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 formed over 360 degrees, the center of the large-diameter hole 9764a coincides with the center of the fastening portion 682. The light emitting operation effect unit 9700 is arranged as described above, and a gap between the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 of the large-diameter hole 9764a and the inclined surface portion 9689b2 of the flanged ring member 9689b in the direction orthogonal to the central axis of the fastening portion 682 is formed. By filling it, the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be restricted (regulated).

Since the weight of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 acts in the direction in which the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 is pressed against the inclined surface portion 9689b2, the degree of limitation of the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be strengthened by utilizing gravity.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the degree of displacement tolerance (limitation) of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 can be switched according to the change in the posture of the displacement member 9680. Therefore, even when the large-diameter hole 9764a, which is a circular through hole having a simple cross section, is adopted, the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 moves back and forth in a state where the displacement member 9680 is tilted and displaced (see FIG. 78 (b)). It is possible to prevent the displacement in the direction and the left-right direction.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 from being displaced during high-speed rotation of the rotating member 810 (see FIG. 62), so that the afterimage display by the rotating member 810 can be advantageously executed.

Next, the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 79. In the second embodiment, the case where the detection sensor 832 detects that the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture and thereby facilitates the tilt displacement of the rotation effect device 800 in the front-rear direction has been described. The rotating member 810 of the above is urged to a proper posture by the posture detecting means 10830. The same parts as those in the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

79 (a) and 79 (b) are front views of the rotating member 810 and the posture detecting means 10830 according to the tenth embodiment. In FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), the arrangement of the internal operation unit 600 in the overhanging state is shown, and the outer diameter of the rotating member 810 is shown by an imaginary line and fixed to the rotating member 810. Gear 10815 is illustrated with a solid line. Further, FIG. 79 (b) shows the proper posture of the rotating member 810, and FIG. 79 (a) shows that the rotating member 810 is angularly deviated from the proper posture (displaced by about 15 degrees in the rotation direction about the rotation axis RJ1). The state is shown, and the rotation directions of the gears 10815, 10821, and 10831 toward the state shown in FIG. 79 (b) are shown by arrows.

As shown in FIGS. 79 (a) and 79 (b), in the rotating member 810, the driving force of the drive gear 10821 fixed to the drive shaft of the drive motor 820 is transmitted to the fixed gear 10815 by gear meshing. The fixed gear 10815 is meshed with the detection gear 10831 of the attitude detecting means 10830.

The detection gear 10831 includes a weight portion 10831a formed with a compaction over an angle range of 180 degrees about the rotation axis. In the present embodiment, the weight portion 10831a is integrally formed from a resin material, although a metal member is fitted to the detection gear 10831.

According to this configuration, since the center of gravity of the detection gear 10831 is arranged on the center side of the weight portion 10831a (on the line connecting the rotation axis and the center of the arc), the rotation of the rotating member 810 is different from the proper posture (the posture (). Even when stopped in FIG. 79 (a)), the detection gear 10831 is urged by gravity so that the rotating member 810 can rotate and return to the proper posture.

Therefore, even if the rotating member 810 cannot be accurately stopped in the proper posture as the stopping posture of the drive motor 820 after the rotary light emitting effect is executed in the overhanging state of the internal operating unit 600 (see FIG. 61). After that, the rotating member 810 can be returned to the proper posture, so that the accuracy of the posture detection of the rotating member 810 can be relaxed. As a result, the product cost can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, the rotation shaft RJ1 in the intermediate state and the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 is not oriented in the vertical direction but in the forward tilting direction (see FIGS. 68 and 69). Therefore, the gravitational bias using the weight portion 10831a can be generated regardless of the posture of the rotating member 810 in the forward tilting direction.

As a result, not only the movement mode in which the rotation member 810 is set to the proper posture in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600 and then the rotation effect device 800 changes its posture in the rising direction, but also during the rising operation of the rotation effect device 800 or in the vertical direction displacement. It is possible to realize a moving mode in which the rotating member 810 is moved while returning to an appropriate posture.

Further, when the rotation effect device 800 rises up and operates from the posture of FIG. 79 (a) (see the time series of FIGS. 67 to 69), the rotating member 810 receives air resistance on the back side and returns to the proper posture. Can be done. That is, in the present embodiment, since the rotating member 810 has a shape that easily receives air resistance from the side surface in the lateral direction, it is possible to easily return the rotating member 810 to the proper posture when the rotating member 810 moves up.

The side surface of the rotating member 810 on the lateral side may be formed from a narrow shape that is less likely to receive air resistance. In this case, the operating resistance of the rotary light emitting effect of the rotary member 810 can be reduced. The action of returning the rotating member 810 to the proper posture can be caused by the weight portion 10831a.

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the second embodiment, the case where the upper connecting member 270 connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is formed with overhanging portions 272 to 277 for distributing the flow path of the sphere has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this.

For example, the portion that distributes the flow path of the sphere may be formed as a recess instead of overhanging. Further, a flow path for guiding the ball may be formed through the recess so that the ball can be guided to another part of the game area.

For example, a member that connects the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 is arranged on the lower side of the center frame 86 to guide the ball to any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 140. It may be configured to include. Further, for example, the member connecting the center frame 86 and the base plate 60 may be configured such that the through gate 67 is arranged.

Further, the upper connecting member 270 is extended along the surface side of the base plate 60, and a game area is formed between the upper connecting member 270 and the glass unit 16, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the front frame 14 may be extended along the back surface side of the glass unit 16 in a closed state, and a game area may be formed between the front frame 14 and the base plate 60. In this case, an overhanging portion may be formed on the base plate 60 side to distribute the flow path of the sphere.

In this case, the fastening position with the base plate 60 is important. For example, if the fastening position is arranged near the inner rail 61 so as not to affect the flow of the ball (lower left of the return ball prevention member 68, etc.). , A sufficient area for the game area can be secured.

In the second embodiment, the case where the upper connecting member 270 is formed from a symmetrical shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the shape of the center frame 86 is such that the left side is separated from the inner rail 61 to form a large space with the inner rail 61 in order to secure the flow path of the sphere, while the right side is the sphere with the outer rail 62. When designed to leave a space slightly longer than the diameter of the game (in the case of a general right-handed machine), it is fully assumed that the upper connecting member 270 is formed only on the left side of the game area. It is also possible to design the left and right sides upside down.

Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which at least one of the base plate 60 or the center frame 86 is arranged on the back surface of the upper connecting member 270, and if the upper connecting member 270 has sufficient rigidity, the upper connecting member is provided. It is fully assumed that the 270 has a portion on the back side where neither the base plate 60 nor the center frame 86 is arranged.

Further, the position where the center frame 86 constitutes the thin plate portion 242 and overhangs does not have to be in the center of the left and right. For example, it may be formed on both the left and right sides, or it may be configured so as to project as a thin plate portion 242 at a plurality of positions and mesh with the base plate 60 (entering each other with a gap).

Further, the thin plate portion 242 may be formed so as to occupy most of the left and right width of the upper connecting member 270. In this case, the left-right width in which the illumination board 251 can be arranged can be expanded.

Further, the arrangement of the illuminated substrate 251 is not limited to the upper side of the center frame 86 with respect to the configuration in which the illuminated substrate 251 is arranged on the back side of the thin plate portion 242 and fits within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60. For example, if thin plate members such as the upper connecting member 270 that are connected to the front surface of the base plate 60 and form one surface of the game area are formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86, the illuminated substrates are formed on the left and right sides of the center frame 86. The 251 can be arranged, and the illumination board 251 is incorporated into the distribution unit 300 and the winning opening component 400 arranged below the base plate 60 so as to be within the thickness dimension of the base plate 60. It may be configured as.

In the second embodiment, the case where the illuminated substrate 251 is arranged so as to be fixed to the base plate 60 on the back surface side of the upper connecting member 270 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the same configuration as the light emitting effect unit 518 arranged in the rear case 510 (a configuration in which a logo or the like corresponding to the model is formed and the LED of the illuminated substrate arranged inside performs the light emitting effect) is on the upper part. It may be arranged at a position behind the connecting member 270 to illuminate the upper connecting member 270 side, or the arrangement of the illumination substrate 251 may be omitted and the light from the rotation effect device 800 passes through the upper connecting member 270. It may be easier for the player to pass.

In the second embodiment, the case where the light from the LED of the ambient light emitting means 251c is applied to the lower edge portion 272a of the first overhanging portion 272 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the LED may be arranged inside the first overhanging portion 272 in front view. In this case, the inside of the first overhanging portion 272 is irradiated by providing a light diffusion process on the concave side of the first overhanging portion 272 or by denting the first overhanging portion 272 in a shape that tapers as it becomes deeper in the recessing direction. The light can be diffused, the visibility of the outer shape of the LED can be lowered, and the visibility of the light emitted from the LED can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the case where the thin plate member 290 is drawn with a pattern, a figure, a character, or a character on the front surface of the plate in a colorful manner has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, light diffusion processing or grain processing may be formed on at least a part of the thin plate member 290, or a shape (for example, a convex lens shape or the like) that penetrates into the recesses of the first overhanging portion 272 and the second overhanging portion 273. , Three-dimensional shape) may form the surface of the thin plate member 290.

In the second embodiment, the holes 291a and 291b formed in the thin plate member 290 form a projecting portion 244b projecting from the center frame 86 side and a projecting portion 279 projecting from the upper connecting member 270. The case where the misalignment of the thin plate member 290 is suppressed by accepting the member has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the projecting portion inserted into the holes 291a and 291b of the thin plate member 290 may be configured to project from either the center frame 86 or the upper connecting member 270. Further, the projecting portion 244b and the projecting portion 279 may not be inserted into different holes 291a and 291b, but may be commonly inserted into a single hole formed in the thin plate member 290. As a result, the thin plate member 290 can be positioned, and the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 270 can also be connected.

In the second embodiment, the projecting portion 244b projecting from the center frame 86 side is formed inside the recess on the back surface side of the second overhanging portion 273, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the projecting portion 244b may be arranged on the back surface side of the plate-shaped portion 271 (so that it is arranged so as to face the plate-shaped portion 271 in the front-rear direction). When the projecting portion 244b is formed inside the recess on the back surface side of the second projecting portion 273, the second projecting portion 273 functions as a blindfold for the projecting portion 244b.

In the second embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down between the side wall portion 453a and the extension plate portion 455a flows into the first ball guide portion 457 with a probability has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the side wall portion 453a and the extending plate portion 455a are spaced apart from each other and the ball guide portion 457 is provided, and the distribution portion 983 is arranged between them so that one of the two can reliably guide the ball. It may flow into the part 457. That is, the ratio of the ball entering the ball guide unit 457 may be changed depending on which of the two postures of the distribution unit 983 the ball is guided.

In the second embodiment, the case where the tilt guide portion 458 is tilted in one direction (lower right direction) to guide the ball directly to the second ball guide portion 459 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. is not it. For example, the tilt guide portion 458 may be extended in opposite directions from both the left and right sides of the ball guide portion 457. For example, the tilt guide portion 458 is configured to meander the ball left and right to guide the ball to the left and right. It may be configured to deflect the ball from the second ball guide portion 459 with a certain probability at the turning position of.

Further, for example, the inclination guide unit 458 may be configured to change the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide unit 459 depending on whether the tilt guide unit 458 guides a single ball or a plurality of balls at the same time. good. For example, by displacing the arrangement of the second ball guide portion 459 in the direction closer to the tilt guide portion 458 in the left-right direction than the current state, the ball that has reached the second ball guide portion 459 first is a trailing ball before it flows down. When the player reaches the second ball guide unit 459, the player can easily deviate from the second ball guide unit 459 by blocking the way to the previous ball.

On the contrary, for example, by displacing the arrangement of the second ball guide portion 459 in the left-right direction slightly away from the tilt guide portion 458, the ball is likely to reach the second ball guide portion 459 first. If the trailing ball reaches the second ball guide portion 459 before the ball that is about to fall from the inclination guide portion 458 has completely fallen, it becomes easier to roll on the previous ball and reach the second ball guide portion 459. It is possible to realize the configuration.

If the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide 459 is lower when guiding a single ball, it means that multiple balls enter the second ball guide 459 and the prize balls paid out at one time are excessive. You can avoid the situation. On the other hand, if the probability of the ball reaching the second ball guide portion 459 is higher when guiding the plurality of balls, the attention to the vicinity of the tilt guide portion 458 when the plurality of balls reach the tilt guide portion 458 is higher. Can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the case where the tilt guide portion 458 is fixed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tilt guide portion 458 may be configured so as to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction. In this case, in the protruding state, the ball can flow into the second ball guide portion 459 as in the second embodiment, while in the retracted state, the ball flowing to the right upstream of the first ball guide portion 457. The rate of reaching the second ball guide portion 459 is reduced. Further, the tilting guide portion 458 is not limited to the case where the tilting guide portion 458 appears and disappears, and the tilting operation may be performed at regular intervals around a rotation axis extending in the front-rear direction so that the tilting angle changes.

In the second embodiment, the case where the number of prize balls when entering the second ball guide unit 459 is larger than the number of prize balls when entering the first ball guide unit 457 has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the number of prize balls may be the same, or the quality of profits obtained by the player may be different depending on the number of balls entered.

For example, as a profit, it is possible to obtain the profit of the lottery of the symbol instead of paying out the prize ball, or the profit that the number of rounds of the jackpot game can be selected (variable) by entering the ball before the start of the jackpot game. However, it may be possible to obtain a profit that the probability of hitting the symbol after the jackpot game changes (increases) by entering the ball during the jackpot game. These benefits can be arbitrarily set in the first ball guide unit 457 and the second ball guide unit 459.

In the second embodiment, the case where the inclination of the ceiling plate portion 455 is substantially constant has been described, but the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the inclination angle of the ceiling plate portion 455 may be a large angle with respect to the horizontal from the intermediate position to the upstream side, and may be a small angle with respect to the horizontal from the same intermediate position to the downstream side. In this case, the rolling speed of the sphere is likely to change depending on whether the sphere lands on the ceiling plate portion 455 on the upstream side of the intermediate position or the sphere lands on the ceiling plate portion 455 on the downstream side of the intermediate position. It is easy to predict the flow path of the ball. That is, it is possible to improve the attention to the intermediate position of the ceiling plate portion 455.

Further, a plurality of ridges for reducing the rolling speed of the sphere may be formed on the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455. In this case, the position of forming the ridges does not have to be formed over the entire left and right width of the ceiling plate portion 455, and may be formed in a partial range in the same manner as the change in inclination.

Further, the plurality of ridges for deceleration are not limited to the upper surface of the ceiling plate portion 455. For example, it may be projected from the resin wall constituting the guide flow path for guiding the ball downward toward the first ball guide portion 457 toward the guide flow path side, or may be projected from the lower surface side of the bulge portion 456 or the inclined guide portion 458. It may be projected from the upper surface side of the sphere to the flow path side of the sphere.

Further, the forming direction of the ridges is not limited to the direction intersecting the front-rear direction. For example, a ridge may be projected from the main body plate portion 451 to the front side, or a front plate member formed from a flat plate shape along a plane parallel to the main body plate portion 451 is arranged on the front side of the main body plate portion 451. When the ball is provided and a flow path of the ball is formed between the main body plate portion 451 and the main body plate portion 451, a ridge may be provided so as to project from the front plate member to the back surface side.

In the second embodiment, the case where the ball that has fallen on the first ball guide unit 457 is smoothly guided to the general winning opening 63 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the internal shape of the first ball guide portion 457 is formed in a mortar shape and the opening at the lower end portion is formed with a size slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere, the sphere passes through the first sphere guide portion 457. You can extend the time it takes to do this.

In this case, if the trailing ball reaches the first ball guide portion 457 while the ball remains in the first ball guide portion 457, it is easy to guide the ball to the tilt guide portion 458 side, and the second guide portion 459. It is possible to increase the probability of a ball entering the ball. Therefore, it is possible to configure the situation so that the ball is guided to the second guide portion 459 side without waiting for the rare situation that a plurality of balls are connected to reach the first ball guide portion 457.

Further, as a method other than devising the shape of the first ball guide portion 457, a movable member that is displaced by the weight of the sphere may be arranged. The movable member is configured to block the entry of the ball into the first ball guide portion 457 within a predetermined period after the ball enters the first ball guide portion 457, and the ball that reaches the movable member is placed on the tilt guide portion 458 side. It is configured to guide you to. As a result, it is possible to improve the probability that the ball will reach the second ball guide unit 459 within a predetermined period after the previous ball has passed the first ball guide unit 457.

In the second embodiment, the case where the left component 450 is formed of a fixed resin member has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the flow path of the sphere may be changed by an electric movable accessory. In this case, the tilt guide portion 458 may be configured so as to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction. That is, the ball is guided to the second ball guide portion 459 side in the state of protruding forward, but the ball may not be guided to the second ball guide portion 459 side in the state of being immersed in the rear, and may fall. ..

Further, for example, a plate-shaped member arranged so as to close the first ball guide portion 457 may be arranged so as to be able to appear and disappear in the front-rear direction. That is, in the state where the plate-shaped member protrudes forward, the ball that has reached the plate-shaped member is guided toward the inclined guide portion 458 side and easily enters the second ball guide portion 459, but the plate-shaped member moves backward. In the immersive state, the ball can be easily dropped onto the first ball guide portion 457.

Further, for example, the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to operate so that the inclined direction is reversed left and right in synchronization with the opening and closing of the opening / closing plate 65b. When the opening / closing plate 65b is in the open state, the inclined plate portion 434 is inclined downward to the left and right inward, so that the second ball guide portion 459 is deflected to the left and right inward, and the ceiling plate portion 455. The ball that has fallen between the and the curved projecting portion 414 can be allowed to flow into the opening / closing plate 65b side. Thereby, the sphere can be configured to be guided from a wide range to the opening / closing plate 65b side.

The inclination of the inclined plate portion 434 may be configured to incline downward to the left and right inward regardless of the presence or absence of electric power. Even in this case, when the opening / closing plate 65b is in the closed state, the destination of the ball that has rolled on the upper surface of the inclined plate portion 434 does not change, so that the playability can be maintained.

In the second embodiment, the ball can be discharged from the game area through the out port 415, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the formation of the vertical plate portion 433 may be omitted, the formation of the out port 415 may be omitted, and the ball passing through the left portion component 450 may be configured to flow down to the opening / closing plate 65b side. This makes it possible to increase the variation of the flow path of the sphere toward the opening / closing plate 65b.

In the second embodiment, the case where the opening / closing plate 65b is formed of a rectangular plate member in front view that is rotationally displaced by a rotation axis extending to the left and right along the lower edge has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, it may be configured in a front view pentagonal shape (a shape similar to a home base) by forming the upper edge portion so as to ascend and incline toward the left and right central portions in the front view. As a result, when the sphere comes into contact with the upper edge portion, the sphere can be easily flown to the left and right outside along the shape of the upper edge portion.

It should be noted that an adjusting means for adjusting the flow mode of the ball flowed to the left and right outside at the upper edge portion of the opening / closing plate 65b may be provided. For example, an extension plate extending downward in parallel with the vertical plate portion 433 from the left and right inner tips of the inclined plate portion 434, and a ball passing hole formed through the extending plate in the left-right direction with a size that allows a ball to pass through. And may be provided.

For example, the arrangement of the ball passage holes is set to a position deviated from the arrangement of the balls flowed to the left and right outside on the upper edge portion 65b of the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state of the opening / closing plate 65b (the position deviated to the upper side). It may be designed as a position that allows the ball flowing to the left and right outside to pass through the upper edge portion 65b of the opening / closing plate 65b when the 65b is between the open state and the closed state.

In this case, the extension plate and the ball passage hole keep the ball on the upper side of the opening / closing plate 65b when the opening / closing plate 65b is open to prevent left-right leakage, while the opening / closing plate 65b causes the ball to flow left and right during closing. It can be configured to be able to (spill).

In addition, in order to maintain the posture of the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state, the projecting portion 430 is provided so as to project from the back side to the back side of the main body plate portion 431 of the covering member 430 at a position where it can be supported. It may be formed in. Further, the projecting portion may abut the opening / closing plate 65b in the tilting direction at both ends of the opening / closing plate 65b in the left-right width direction. In this case, it becomes easy to maintain the posture of the opening / closing plate 65b in the open state.

In the second embodiment, when the distribution unit 300 passes through the discharge opening 325 after the ball guided forward by the direction switching unit 317 is switched in the left-right direction above the detection device SE3. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the winning opening 323 may be used as the discharge opening to discharge the ball. In this case, a through hole having a size that allows the ball to fall may be formed on the lower surface of the direction switching portion 317, and the ball that has fallen into the through hole may be detected by the detection device SE3. Further, as the same configuration, the arrangement of the discharge opening and the detection device SE3 may be reversed.

Further, the same configuration may be adopted in which the switching direction of the flow path by the direction switching portion 317 is not the front side but the rear side, or the ball passes from above the winning opening 323 to the front and the base plate. It may be configured to be discharged to the front side of 60.

In this case, since it is not necessary to dispose the discharge opening 325 on the left and right sides of the detection device SE3, the left-right distance between the pair of left and right detection devices SE3 can be narrowed, or the left and right spaces of the detection device SE3 can be nailed. It can be effectively used as a planting space.

Further, these configurations do not have to be the same around the left and right detection devices SE3, and separate left and right configurations may be adopted. For example, during the jackpot game, a configuration may be adopted in which a ball that has passed forward from above the winning opening 323 can be picked up by the opening / closing plate 65b on one side of the left and right sides. In this case, the winning opening 323 In the case where the ball is guided to the side where the ball passes from above to the front and in the opposite case, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 returns to the front side of the base plate 60 and becomes the opening / closing plate 65b. The probability of being picked up changes. Therefore, it is possible to improve the attention to the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64.

In the second embodiment, the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is retracted above the center frame 86 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged in front of the third symbol display device 81 in the overhanging state has been described. , Not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 may be configured to be vertically long and retracted to the left and right sides of the center frame 86.

Further, following the configuration in which the front frame 14 is configured to project forward from the upper edge portion, a configuration is adopted in which the front frame 14 projects forward from the left and right edge portions, and a light emitting operation effect is produced on the overhanging portion. The unit 700 may be configured to be retracted. In this case, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be configured to be retracted to the front side of both the left and right edges and to be arranged while retracting to the front side of the third symbol display device 81 in the overhanging state.

In the second embodiment, the tubular member 695 has been described as a member that comes into contact with the rotating member 810, but the material of the tubular member 695 is not limited at all. For example, it may be formed of a hard resin material that does not deform in shape under a load given by the rotating member 810. In this case, excessive displacement of the rotating member 810 can be suppressed.

Further, it may be formed from a soft resin material that can be deformed (deformed in the radial direction) even with a load given by the rotating member 810. In this case, the tubular member 695 functions as a cushioning material, and damage to the rotating member 810 can be easily avoided.

In the second embodiment, the figures and patterns formed on the decorative plate 811 are designed to be visually recognized integrally with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511 in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted to the left or right in a specific vertical arrangement, the decorative plate 811 can be visually recognized integrally with the figures and patterns formed on the bottom wall portion 511. The formed figure or pattern may be designed. In this case, the contents visually recognized integrally are designed so as to be different depending on whether the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted to the left side or the right side, thereby producing the effect of the bottom wall portion 511 and the decorative plate 811. Can be improved.

In the second embodiment, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 tilts up and down while being displaced up and down to change the outer shape of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front view and the change in the vertical position of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Although the case where the two occur at the same time has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the outer shape of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the front view may be changed while maintaining the vertical arrangement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700. Also in the second embodiment, for example, when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is in the intermediate state of the internal operation unit 600 and the rotating member 810 is rotationally displaced by a predetermined angle about the rotation axis RJ1, the projection direction of the rotating member 810 is changed. Therefore, the outer shape of the rotating member 810 in the front view can be changed.

In the second embodiment, the front-rear displacement member 653 that causes resistance to the up-and-down displacement of the elevating plate member 630 is configured as a member that is displaced in the front-rear direction by the solenoid 651, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a rotating arm that is displaced by the driving force of a drive motor can be displaced in a direction that is close to or away from the abutted plate 638, and a frictional force is generated or moves with the abutted plate 638. Displacement resistance of the elevating plate member 630 may be generated by blocking the direction.

In the second embodiment, the case where the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed in a direction orthogonal to the displacement direction of the elevating plate member 630 (a direction on a plane orthogonal to the moving direction of the elevating plate member 630) has been described. However, it is not always limited to this. That is, the angle formed by the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 and the displacement direction (vertical direction) of the elevating plate member 630 does not have to be a right angle.

For example, when the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to be upwardly inclined toward the front, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is downwardly displaced. By applying an upward load in addition to the sliding friction, the time until the elevating plate member 630 is stopped can be shortened. On the other hand, if the elevating plate member 630 is upwardly displaced, the kinetic energy of the elevating plate member 630 is reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the elevating plate member 630 by applying an upward load in addition to the sliding friction. Can be done.

Further, when the displacement direction of the front-rear displacement member 653 is designed to be downwardly inclined toward the front, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward, if the elevating plate member 630 is upwardly displaced, the sliding By applying a downward load in addition to the dynamic friction, the time until the elevating plate member 630 is stopped can be shortened. On the other hand, if the elevating plate member 630 is downwardly displaced, the kinetic energy of the elevating plate member 630 is reduced while avoiding sudden deceleration of the elevating plate member 630 by applying a downward load in addition to the sliding friction. Can be done.

In the second embodiment, the abutting plate 638 and the front-rear displacement member 653 are configured so that the overlapped front-rear widths in the vertical direction are substantially the same regardless of whether the internal operation unit 600 is in the retracted state or the overhanging state. However, it is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed by an inclined surface that inclines backward as it goes upward. In this case, if the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the contacted plate 638 is downwardly displaced, a load is generated on the contacted plate 638 in a direction of picking up from the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653. Therefore, the action of braking the elevating plate member 630 can be strengthened.

Further, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 may be formed by an inclined surface that inclines backward toward the downward direction. In this case, if the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward when the contacted plate 638 is displaced upward, a load in a direction of pressing the front-rear displacement member 653 downward from the front end surface of the contacted plate 638. Therefore, the action of braking the elevating plate member 630 can be strengthened.

Further, for example, the shape of the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653 has a predetermined intermediate position between an inclined surface that inclines backward from the lower end position toward the upper side and an inclined surface that inclines backward from the upper end position toward the lower side. In accordance with this, an overhanging portion that projects rearward may be formed at an intermediate position of the rear end surface of the contacted plate 638.

In this case, when the front-rear displacement member 653 is displaced forward while the contact plate 638 is arranged on the front side of the front-rear displacement member 653, the front-end displacement member 653 is brought into contact with a predetermined intermediate position on the front end surface. The vertical position of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized in such a manner that the overhanging portion of the plate 638 is accommodated.

In this case, the number of portions where the inclined surface inclined backward toward the lower side and the inclined surface inclined backward toward the upper side are united is not limited to the front end surface of the front-rear displacement member 653. For example, it may have a shape (for example, a saw blade shape or a jagged shape) that constitutes a plurality of parts to be combined. In this case, the vertical positions of the elevating plate member 630 can be stabilized at a plurality of positions.

In the second embodiment, the case where the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 are configured to be vertically displaced is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the left and right elevating plate members 630 may be fastened and fixed to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 so that the vertical position deviation of the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 is not allowed. In this case, it is sufficient that the resistance generator 650 for generating the displacement resistance of the elevating plate member 630 is configured on only one of the left and right sides.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, since the vertical position deviation of the pair of left and right elevating plate members 630 is allowed, it is preferable to arrange the resistance generators 650 on both the left and right sides. Using this configuration, control may be performed to shift the excitation timing of the left and right solenoids 651.

For example, when the internal operation unit 600 is displaced downward from the retracted state to the intermediate state, the drive control of the drive motor 648 is executed in a state where the pair of left and right solenoids 651 are excited and the front-rear displacement member 653 is arranged rearward. When the same drive control as in the above is executed with the solenoid 651 on the left side excited and the solenoid 651 on the right side de-excited, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is in an inclined posture in which the left side is arranged downward with respect to the right side. It is possible to execute such an effect operation.

This effect operation can be executed without imposing a load on the internal operation unit 600 up to the operation error limit state of the internal operation unit 600. Further, instead of increasing the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 for this effect operation, the drive pattern of the drive motor 648 used at the time of the downward displacement of the internal operation unit 600 is diverted, and the excitation of the solenoid 651 is different. By executing with, the production operation is executed. Therefore, the drive pattern required for the drive motor 648 can be reduced.

Further, the timing for de-energizing the solenoid 651 on the right side is not limited to the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600. For example, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides may be excited in the retracted state of the internal operating unit 600, and the solenoid 651 on the right side may be de-excited while the internal operating unit 600 is in the intermediate state from the retracted state. In this case, the downward displacement of the elevating plate member 630 on the right side can be delayed by the frictional force, and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 executes an effect operation such that the left side is arranged downward with respect to the right side. Can be done.

As an effect operation, an example from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 has been described, but it is naturally assumed that the vertical direction is reversed. That is, the above-mentioned excitation pattern of the pair of left and right solenoids 651 may be executed according to the displacement of the internal operation unit 600 from the overhanging state.

In the second embodiment, in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, the rotation effect device 800 is rotated in a state where the upward displacement of the contacted plate 638 of the elevating plate member 630 is restricted by the front-rear displacement member 653. Although the case where the light emission effect is executed has been described, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this.

For example, as a type of rotary light emitting effect executed in the overhanging state of the internal operation unit 600, as an out-of-lottery effect different from the effect for jackpot notification executed in a state where the rotation axis RJ1 is fixed, both left and right sides. Alternatively, the rotation effect of the rotation effect device 800 may be executed while the solenoids 651 on one of the left and right sides are excited.

In this case, since the front-rear displacement member 653 is retracted from the moving path of the contacted plate 638 on the side where the solenoid 651 is excited, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the elevating plate member 630 are generated by the centrifugal force of the rotation of the rotating member 810. Even if the displacement is increased, the front-rear displacement member 653 does not suppress the upward displacement.

Therefore, the rotation shaft RJ1 of the rotating member 810 is easily displaced. As a result, it is possible to perform an operation effect in which the rotation light emission effect of the rotating member 810 is executed in a state where the rotation shaft RJ1 is not fixed. Therefore, the rotation speed of the rotation member 810 and the light emitted from the rotation member 810 in the rotation light emission effect can be obtained. Although the light emission pattern is the same, the figure visually recognized by the afterimage display of the rotating member 810 can be different.

In order to form a state in which the rotating shaft RJ1 is not fixed, the solenoids 651 on both the left and right sides may be excited or the solenoids 651 on the left and right sides may be excited, but the solenoids 651 on the left and right sides are excited. By de-energizing the solenoid 651 on the other side, it is possible to regulate the vertical displacement of the ascending plate member 630 on the non-excited side, so that the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the elevating plate member 630 become excessive. It is possible to suppress the ascending displacement, and it is possible to avoid damage to the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and the lifting plate member 630.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rack gear portion 634 is brought close to and separated from the transmission gear 649 to change the transmission efficiency has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the drive motor 648 and the drive shaft may be configured to be displaceable back and forth so that the transmission gear 649 can be displaced back and forth with respect to the rack gear portion 634.

Further, the transmission gear 649 may be formed so that the diameter length of the transmission gear 649 changes in the axial direction. In this case, the transmission efficiency can be changed by displacing the transmission gear 649 or the elevating plate member 630 in the drive shaft direction.

Although the displacement of the rack gear portion 634 in a state where the meshing between the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 is maintained has been described, the displacement is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be separated from the transmission gear 649 to the extent that the mesh is disengaged. In this case, even if the drive motor 648 goes out of control, the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 are damaged by configuring the rack gear portion 634 to separate from the transmission gear 649 before the rack gear portion 634 is overloaded. Can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, the rack gear portion 634 is pressed against the transmission gear 649 by the weight of the elevating plate member 630 to optimize the gear meshing state, while the rack gear portion 634 is pressed against the transmission gear by the driving force of the solenoid 651. The case where the gear is pushed away from the 649 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rack gear portion 634 may be configured to be displaced by the driving force of the solenoid 651 in both directions regardless of the displacement direction. Further, the direction in which the driving force of the solenoid 651 is generated may be reversed. Further, the transmission gear 649 or the drive motor 648 may be configured to be displaceable in the direction perpendicular to the axis of the drive shaft.

In the second embodiment, the thickness of the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 guided through the elongated holes 672 to 674 is such that the tubular portion has electrical wiring inserted inside the tubular portion 684. Although the case where the 684 is thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686 has been described, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, even if the inside is not hollow but closed, the tubular portion 684 may be formed thicker than the metal rod-shaped member 686, and the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed thicker than the tubular portion 684. It may be formed thick.

By forming the metal rod-shaped member 686 (member on the front side) thickly, it is possible to withstand a large area of a load generated at a position far from the central axis J1 when the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is tilted and displaced. As a result, the durability of the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be improved, so that, for example, the durability when the member is formed of a resin material can be improved.

Further, the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 may be formed with the same thickness. In this case, the clearances set in the elongated holes 672 to 674 can be designed with the same numerical values, and the degree of wear of the elongated holes 672 to 674 can be made uniform.

In the second embodiment, the case where the pair of upper and lower elongated holes 612 are designed to have the same clearance in the front-rear direction with the fastening portions 632 and 633 of the elevating plate member 630 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the clearance between the lower elongated hole 612 and the lower fastening portion 633 of the elevating plate member 630 is formed to be larger than the clearance between the upper elongated hole 612 and the upper fastening portion 632 of the elevating plate member 630. You may. In this case, since the allowable width for the lower portion of the elevating plate member 630 to be displaced in the front-rear direction can be increased, the meshing state of the rack gear portion 634 and the transmission gear 649 is changed by the front-rear displacement of the elevating plate member 630. It can be made easier.

In the second embodiment, the case where the second elongated hole 673 is formed as an elongated hole extending vertically has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the second elongated hole 673 connected to the curved elongated hole 674 may be extended so as to be inclined downward toward the front side so that the side closer to the curved elongated hole 674 is arranged forward. good. In this case, the metal rod-shaped member 686 can be displaced in the front-rear direction while the metal rod-shaped member 686 is guided to the second elongated hole 673.

That is, in the state before reaching the intermediate state from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, it is possible to realize an operation in which the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is gradually changed in the tilting direction.

The inclination of the second elongated hole 673 does not need to be formed from the upper end portion, but is formed as an elongated hole that is long in the vertical direction from the upper end portion to the middle, and extends in a downwardly inclined direction from the middle. It may be configured. In this case, when the elevating plate member 630 is started from the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600, the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be maintained, so that the base plate 60 and the light emitting operation effect unit 700 collide with each other. Can be avoided.

In the second embodiment, the case where the center of gravity position G1 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 is arranged between the tubular portion 684 and the metal rod-shaped member 686 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the center of gravity position G1 may be arranged on the opposite side of the tubular portion 684 with reference to the metal rod-shaped member 686, or may be arranged on the opposite side of the metal rod-shaped member 686 with reference to the tubular portion 684.

In the second embodiment, the case where the shaped portion supporting the tubular portion 684 is formed with elongated holes has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the tubular portion 684 may be configured so that the shaft can rotate with a fixed shaft.

In the second embodiment, the case where the displacement members 680 supporting the light emitting operation effect unit 700 are arranged on the left and right sides of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and are displaced in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 may be configured to be displaced in the front-rear direction or the front-rear direction and the vertical direction combined, or the displacement members 680 may be arranged on one left and right sides of the light emission operation effect unit 700. The displacement members 680 may be arranged above and below the light emitting operation effect unit 700 and may be configured to be displaced in the left-right direction or the front-rear direction.

In the second embodiment, the case where the rotation effect device 800 that rotates is adopted as the movable member arranged in the light emitting operation effect unit 700 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a movable member that reciprocates in the linear direction may be adopted, or a movable member that vibrates may be adopted.

In the second embodiment, the case where the support hole 764b is arranged on the lower side of the two upper and lower connected holes 764 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the support holes 764b may be arranged on the upper side, or the support holes 764b may be provided on both the upper and lower sides.

When both the top and bottom of the connected holes 764 on the right side are support holes 764b and the top and bottom of the left side to be connected holes 764 are elongated holes 764a, only the displacement of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 with respect to the displacement member 680 in the left-right direction is present. It is permissible, and it is possible to suppress a change in posture in the rotation direction about the fastening portion 682 of the light emitting operation effect unit 700.

Further, the through hole is not limited to the elongated hole 764a, and a through hole having a shape having a larger clearance than the support hole 764b can be arbitrarily designed. For example, it may be formed as a perfect circular through hole having an inner diameter sufficiently larger than the outer diameter of the fastening portion 684. Further, for example, as the support hole 764b, an elongated hole having a length shorter in the longitudinal direction than the elongated hole 764a may be adopted. In this case, the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can perform horizontal operation in the left-right direction.

If the diagonally connected holes 764 are both supported holes 764b among the settings of the shapes of the left and right connected holes 764, the misalignment of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 in the left-right direction is also centered on the fastening portion 682. The change in posture in the rotation direction is also suppressed. Therefore, it is good if it is formed with sufficient strength so that the arrangement does not shift and the operation is controlled precisely, but if it is not, a slight malfunction will lead to damage to the light emitting operation effect unit 700. , You need to be careful.

In the third embodiment, the case where the opening 3982k is formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 will be described, and in the fourth embodiment, the opening 4985k will be formed on the rear side of the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2. Has been described, but is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured so that both openings 3982k and 4985k are formed. In this case, the resistance to ball clogging can be improved.

Further, for example, an opening may be formed on the front side of the first passage TR1 and an opening may be formed on the rear side of the second passage TR2. Further, a merging flow path may be formed in which the spheres discharged from these openings are merged on the downstream side. In this case, since the appearance of the sphere flowing down to the left and right can be changed, it is possible to improve the effect of the effect using the sphere.

Further, for example, an opening is formed in at least one of the front side and the rear side from the first passage TR1, and an opening is formed in at least one of the left side or the right side from the second passage TR2, and the first passage is formed through each opening. The ball may be configured to be discharged from TR1 or the second passage TR2.

In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the case where the opening 985d is provided has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the formation of the opening 985d is omitted, the distance between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 directly above the detection device SE3 is narrowed, and the left-right distance of the detection device SE3 is narrowed accordingly. The left-right spacing of 985f may be narrowed. In this case, the left-right width at the lower end of the bulging portion 982 can be further shortened.

In the third embodiment and the fourth embodiment, the case where a space is formed between the erection wall 982a arranged between the first passage TR1 and the second passage TR2 has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, a 7-segment display device may be arranged and used as an effect range by the 7-segment display, or a small liquid crystal display device may be arranged.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the passage for guiding the game ball is formed on the base plate 60 and the upper connecting member 5270 on the back side of the game area has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the passage for guiding the game ball may be formed in the upper connecting member 270 and the center frame 86, may be formed in the center frame 86 and the base plate 60, or may be formed in the base plate 60. , The center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270 may be formed, or the base plate 60, the center frame 86 and the upper connecting member 5270 may be formed.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the opening 5274a is formed in the third overhanging portion 5274 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed on any of the other overhanging portions 272, 5273 and 275-277. Further, the destination of the ball after flowing down may be different for each opening.

For example, the sphere that has passed through the first opening reaches the upper surface of the strip-shaped extension portion 263, and the sphere that has passed through the second opening returns from directly above the nail KG2 to the front side of the base plate 60, and the third opening. The sphere that has passed through may be returned to the front side of the base plate 60 from directly above the curved protrusion 414. In this case, aiming at the first opening makes it easier for the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, while aiming at the second opening or the third opening makes it difficult for the ball to head toward the first winning opening 64. , The ball can be easily guided to the ball guide units 457 and 459 and the specific winning opening 65a.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 reciprocates on the front side of the game board 13 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 may be configured to be movable to a position (a position on the back side of the game board 13) in the retracted state of the internal operation unit 600 described in the second embodiment.

In this case, a state that is difficult for the player to see can be configured at two positions: a position in the retracted state arranged on the back side of the game board 13 and an upper end position of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700. Therefore, a shutter, a light guide plate, etc. for blocking the player's field of view are arranged in the second glass unit 6016b, and the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is moved while blocking the player's field of view to make it difficult to see. This makes it impossible to know which of the two positions the light emitting operation effect unit 6700 is located. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to predict the operation effect of the light emitting operation effect unit 6700.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed as an elongated hole extending in the vertical direction halfway has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be configured to be inclined or curved in a direction toward the rear as it approaches the recessed portion 7674a instead of in the vertical direction. In this case, since the tubular portion 684 is also displaced rearward at the same time during the downward displacement, the displacement member 680 can be configured to change its posture in the forward rotation direction at the same time as the downward displacement.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the L-shaped elongated hole 7674 is formed in an L-shape so as to extend rearward at the lower end portion has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be formed so as to extend further downward from the vertical position of the recessed portion 7674a. In this case, by entering the recessed portion 7674a, the vertical displacement of the tubular portion 684 can be regulated at an intermediate position in the vertical displacement possible range of the tubular portion 684. Even if a load due to regulation occurs, the tubular portion 684 is formed thick, so that damage can be easily avoided.

In the eighth embodiment, the rotation axis RJ1 of the rotation member 810 is in a posture that coincides with the front-rear direction in a state where the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at an intermediate position of the curved elongated hole 8674. In that state, the rotating member 810 may be rotated at high speed to execute the rotational light emission effect. Even if the metal rod-shaped member 686 is arranged at an intermediate position of the curved elongated hole 8674, the posture of the light emitting operation effect unit 700 can be maintained by restricting the vertical displacement of the elevating plate member 630 by the resistance generator 650. , The displacement of the rotation axis RJ1 can be suppressed.

In the eighth embodiment, since the displacement member 680 is in a posture of tilting in the forward rotation direction before tilting, the back surface side (radiating plate 812 side) of the rotating member 810 is turned toward the player side after tilting displacement. It is in a posture. Even in this case, the back surface side of the rotating member 810 is covered with a heat radiating plate 812, and the illuminated substrate is also housed inside and is not exposed.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the displacement member 680 is displaced in the front-rear direction while being downwardly displaced has been described. In this case, the front-rear position of the rotation effect device 800 is tilted before the displacement member 680 is tilted and displaced. It may be designed so that the position is the same as that after the operation. Thereby, for example, it is possible to reduce the design difficulty when a plurality of sets of the displacement member 680, the light emitting operation effect unit 700, and the rotation effect device 800 are stacked and arranged in the front-rear direction.

The shapes of the elongated holes 8672a, 8672b, 8673, 8674, and 8675 are not limited in any way. For example, it may have a wavy shape, or it may be a combination of a linear hole and a wavy (curved) hole.

In the ninth embodiment, the load between the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1 changes depending on the posture of the displacement member 9680, so that the ease of misalignment of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 changes. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a high-friction resin material may be arranged at the pressed portion, or a high-viscosity sheet member may be arranged at the pressed portion, without depending on the design of the inclined surface portion 9689b2 and the chamfered inclined portion 9764a1. However, one or more recesses and protrusions that fit each other may be formed at the points where they are pressed against each other.

The shape of the concave portion and the convex portion may be an uneven shape formed around a point, or may be a ridge or a concave groove formed around a straight line or a curved line. In the case of a ridge or a concave groove, the misalignment of the light emitting operation effect unit 9700 in the direction along the extension direction is easy to tolerate, while the misalignment of the light emission operation effect unit 9700 in the direction intersecting the extension direction is limited. It can be made easier.

In the tenth embodiment, the case where the action of setting the rotating member 810 to the proper posture is caused by the urging of the detection gear 10831 by its own weight has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the posture of the rotating member 810 may be strictly controlled.

Further, the rotating member 810 may be prevented from rising and operating in the backflip direction until the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture. For example, when the rotating member 810 is in the proper posture, the engaging portion is retracted to the left and right inward, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the proper posture, the engaging portion is provided in the rotation effect device 800, and when the rotating member 810 is out of the proper posture, the engaging portion is arranged in the rotation effect device 800. May be fitted (insertable) to the inner member 670, and the movement of the rotating member 810 in the rising direction may be restricted at the time of fitting. In this case, since it is possible to mechanically prevent the rotating member 810 from rising and operating without being in a proper posture, it is possible to prevent the rotating member 810 from being unexpectedly damaged.

In each of the above embodiments, the case where the detection devices SE3 arranged on the downstream side of the first winning opening 64 are arranged on the left and right sides so as to be the same in the front-rear position has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. Absent. For example, the arrangement of the detection device SE3 may be displaced back and forth.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device that displays the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and is caused by the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever). The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Resin component that replaces nails>
In a game machine including a game board main body, a fixed member whose arrangement is fixed to the game board main body, and a connecting member for connecting the game board main body and the fixed member, the connecting member is a game. A game machine A1 characterized in that it can guide a ball.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine in which a flow path of a game ball is randomly configured by a nail driven into a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-325743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the flow path of the game ball is composed only of nails, it is necessary to drive the nails into almost the entire area of the game board, but the strength of the part where the nails are hit is secured. Therefore, it is necessary to make the game board thicker, so that there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board is lowered, especially in the design in the thickness direction.

On the other hand, according to the game machine A1, the game ball can be guided by the connecting member that connects the game board main body and the fixed member. Therefore, the range in which the connecting member is arranged is the game board main body. There is no need to drive nails into the ball. Therefore, within the range in which the connecting member is arranged, the degree of freedom in designing the shape of the game board body, particularly in the thickness direction, can be improved.

For example, by forming a thin wall at a place where the thickness can be arbitrarily designed, the material cost can be reduced by reducing the volume of the member required for the entire game board, or the production member (electricity) can be used in the space vacated as a result of the thin wall. A decorative substrate, etc.) can be arranged to enable various light emission effects.

The arrangement of the connecting members is not limited in any way, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the connecting member may be arranged above the center frame of the game board so as to form a portion where the game ball introduced into the game area first collides, or the center as a member for holding the through gate inside. It may be arranged on the left and right sides of the frame, or may be arranged on the lower side of the center frame as a member for guiding the game ball to the winning opening.

Further, the connecting member may be formed in a symmetrical shape or may be formed in a left-right asymmetric shape. Basically, when the game area has a symmetrical shape, it is preferable that the connecting member also has a symmetrical shape, and when the game area has a left-right asymmetric shape (for example, in the case of a right-handed machine). It is preferable that the connecting member also has a left-right asymmetric shape.

In the game machine A1, the connecting member includes a guide portion that can guide the game ball, and the guide portion is configured to project toward the game area side.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect of the game machine A1, the action effect similar to that of a nail overhanging on the game area side can be generated by the guide portion, and the connecting member transmits light. When formed from a sex resin material, it can transmit light more easily than a nail. Therefore, even in the range in which the guide portion is arranged, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the light emitted from the back of the guide portion to the player side from being lowered.

As the shape of the guide portion, the shape of the nail may be imitated, but when the thin shape of the nail is formed from the resin material, the strength is lower than that of the nail made of the metal material, so that a plurality of nails are used. It may be formed from a shape that surrounds the arranged range with a single guide portion. Thereby, even when it is formed from a resin material, the lack of strength can be solved.

In the game machine A2, the game machine A3 is characterized in that the guide portion is provided with a recessed portion on the opposite side of the game region side.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2, the weight of the connecting member can be reduced. Further, since the wall thickness of the guide portion is reduced, the guide portion can be easily bent, and when the game ball collides with the guide portion, the guide portion is bent, so that the guide portion is bent between the game ball and the guide portion. Since the generated load can be alleviated, it is possible to easily avoid damage to the guide portion due to the load at the time of impact.

In the game machine A2 or A3, the guide portion includes a first guide portion arranged close to the game board main body and a second guide portion arranged close to the fixed member, and the first guide portion is provided. Is a gaming machine A4 characterized in that it is formed to be narrower than the second guide portion.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of the game machine A2 or A3, since the first guide portion is narrow, the guide portion itself is easily bent, and the load can be released even if the game board main body does not bend. On the other hand, in the second guide portion, even if the guide portion itself does not bend, the load can be released by bending the fixed member formed as a thin plate.

The narrow width may be set to have a small maximum width, or may be specified by having a narrow portion as in the case where the shape is a triangle.

In any of the game machines A2 to A4, the guide portion is characterized in that a portion where the angle at which the sides constituting the frame shape in the overhanging direction intersect at the maximum is arranged below the upper end position. Game machine A5.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A4, it is possible to allow bending deformation around the portion where the angle is maximum to make it easier to withstand the collision of the game ball. it can.

In any of the game machines A1 to A5, the game machine A6 is characterized in that the fixed member is formed in an annular shape and is fixed to the inside of the game board main body.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines A1 to A5, the shape of the fixed member can be easily held by the rigidity of the game board main body.

In any of the game machines A1 to A6, the game machine A7 is configured such that the connecting member and the game board main body or the fixed member overlap each other, and the overlapping target changes depending on the location.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A6, when the game board body is formed without omitting the game board body by omitting the formation of the game board body and covering it with the fixed member. In comparison, the material cost required for the game board body can be reduced.

Further, in the range where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap, it is possible to easily pass the light emitted from the back surface, and the space on the back surface side can be secured by forming the fixed member to be thin. , The degree of freedom in arranging the effect device can be improved.

In the game machine A7, the game machine A8 in which the light emitting means is arranged behind the portion where the fixed member and the connecting member overlap.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of the game machine A7, the space for arranging the light emitting means is formed by forming the fixed member with a thin wall as compared with the case where the light emitting means is arranged behind the game board main body. Can be easily secured.

In any of the game machines A1 to A8, a thin-walled decorative member is provided between the fixed-walled member and the connecting member, and the thin-walled decorative member is the first positioning formed on the fixed-walled member. The gaming machine A9 is characterized in that it is aligned with the portion and the second positioning portion formed on the connecting member.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A8, the thin-walled decorative member can be aligned without being limited to the shapes of the fixed member and the connecting member.

In the game machine A9, the game machine A10 is characterized in that the first positioning portion and the second positioning portion are engaged with each other.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, the first positioning unit and the second positioning unit can align the fixed member and the connecting member.

<Distribution without nails>
The guiding means includes a passing area through which the game ball can pass, a guiding means configured to guide the game ball to the passing area, and a flow-down area in which the game ball passing through the passing area flows down. The ratio of guiding the game ball to the passing area is variable, and the flow area includes a first entry port and a second entry port formed so that the game ball can enter, and the first entry The game machine B1 is characterized in that the ratio of a game ball entering the ball opening and the ratio of the game ball entering the second entry port can be maintained.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine that distributes a game ball to a winning opening by a nail driven into a game board (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-325743). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, the nail used for distributing the flow path of the game ball may change its state with respect to the base plate due to the collision with the game ball, and the change in the state causes the nail to enter the winning opening. There is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of fairness of the game because a state in which the ball is easy to hit and a state in which it is difficult to enter the ball can be formed.

On the other hand, according to the game machine B1, in a situation where the ratio of the guiding means guiding the game ball to the passing region can be changed, the flow-down region is the ratio of the game ball entering the first entrance and the first. Since the ratio of the game ball entering the two entrances can be maintained, the game ball may easily enter the first entrance or the second entrance, or may become difficult to enter. This can be avoided and can be improved from the viewpoint of fairness of the game.

The game machine B1 is characterized in that the flow-down region is formed of a resin material.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1, the flow-down region is formed of the resin material. Therefore, if a part of the resin member forming the flow-down region is damaged, the resin member itself should be replaced. Can be easily restored to its original state. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of maintainability and improvement of the operating period of the game machine as compared with the case where the game ball is distributed with nails.

Further, in the case of nails, even if they are bent, it is difficult to visually distinguish them, and while the operation may occur in a state where the distribution state (balance) of the game ball has changed from the time of shipment, the flow area from the resin material. When the shape is formed, it is possible to make it difficult to form a state different from the state at the time of shipment by making the shape difficult to bend or designing the shape to be easily damaged when bending occurs. As a result, it is possible to easily maintain the distribution state (balance) of the game ball as it is at the time of shipment.

In the game machine B1 or B2, the first ball entry port is arranged on the upstream side of the second ball entry port, and the profit obtained by the player when the game ball enters the second ball entry port is obtained. The gaming machine B3, characterized in that the profit is larger than the profit obtained by the player when the gaming ball enters the first entrance.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1 or B2, it is possible to pay attention to whether or not the game ball flows down to the second entrance side.

The mode of profit that the player can obtain is not limited in any way. For example, the presence or absence of prize balls, the number of prize balls, the presence or absence of a lottery of symbols, the profit that the probability of lottery changes depending on the passage of game balls, or a combination of these may be used.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, an upstream means that is arranged on the upstream side of the passing region and can guide the game ball in a third direction different from the passing region is provided, and the upstream means is said. The game ball configured to prevent the game ball from flowing down to the second entry port, and the game ball distributed in the third direction passes through a profit passing means that the player can benefit from when entering the ball. A game machine B4 characterized in that it can flow down a route.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, the game ball that did not go to the passing area side does not interfere with the flow of the ball toward the second entrance, and further. Since there is a possibility of passing through the profit passing means, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball deviated from the passing area side.

In the game machine B4, the game ball guided in the third direction by the upstream side means has a higher possibility of entering the profit passing means when the point where the guidance is started is on the upstream side. A game machine B5 characterized by being configured as such.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of the game machine B4, the attention of the upstream side means can be improved not only on the downstream side arranged on the profit passing means side but also on the upstream side. In other words, even if you are dissatisfied with the normal game, you can configure the game area so that you will be comfortable with the jackpot game.

In the game machine B5, the game machine B6 is characterized in that the first member constituting the general winning opening side and the second member forming the profit passing means side are positioned by engaging the resin constituent members with each other.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of the game machine B5, the fastening screw can be omitted as compared with the case where the first member and the second member are fixed by the metal fastening screw. Visibility at the overlapping position of the member and the second member can be improved.

In the game machine B6, the game machine B7 is characterized in that the positioning method is sandwiching with the game board.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effect of the game machine B6, it is possible to easily define the positional relationship between the first member and the second member in the portion arranged to face the game area. As a result, it is possible to prevent the flow of the game ball flowing down while contacting the first member and the second member from being irregularly disturbed. That is, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the front-rear positions of the first member and the second member are reversed, which tends to occur when the member is fixed to the game board main body with the fastening screw.

The game machine B8 is characterized in that any one of the game machines B5 to B7 is provided with a deceleration protrusion that secures the momentum of the game machine until it comes directly above the profit passing means and decelerates after coming directly above. ..

According to the game machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B5 to B7, it is possible to avoid damage to the profit passing means due to the game ball colliding with the profit passing means at high speed.

The game machine B9 is characterized in that the profit passing means after collecting the profits from a wide range on the left and right are widened on the left and right.

According to the game machine B9, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8, even if the game ball arrives at the profit passing means continuously, the game ball that has reached earlier is flowed to the left and right, so that it is easy to accept the follow-up game ball. can do. As a result, it is possible to easily avoid a defective ball entry when the game ball continuously reaches the profit passing means.

The game machine B10 is characterized in that, in the game machine B8 or B9, an auxiliary means for assisting the flow of the game ball in a predetermined manner is provided behind the flow path of the game ball to the profit passing means.

According to the game machine B10, in addition to the effect of the game machine B8 or B9, the flow of the game ball to the profit passing means can be assisted in a predetermined manner by the auxiliary means. It can be improved in a predetermined manner.

In the game machine B10, the auxiliary means is a game ball that enters and flows down into a predetermined winning opening, and a game machine B11 that is a flow path of the game ball.

According to the game machine B11, in addition to the effect of the game machine B10, the game ball that enters the predetermined winning opening and flows down can be made to appear as if it is flowing down toward the profit passing means. As a result, the game balls that have entered the predetermined winning opening during the jackpot game can be added as the number of game balls that appear to enter the profit passing means, so that most of the launched game balls are profitable. You can make the illusion that you are entering the passing means.

In the game machine B10, the auxiliary means is a decorative means for decorating the flow path to the profit passing means from the rear.

According to the game machine B12, in addition to the effect of the game machine B10, when the player's attention is focused on the flow path to the profit passage means, the game is played by the decorative means as compared with the case where the decoration is not applied. It is possible to improve the interest of the person.

In any of the game machines B1 to B12, the rate at which the game ball enters the first ball entry port in the flow area and the rate at which the game ball enters the second ball entry port are maintained at different rates. A game machine B13 characterized in that it can be executed in a plurality of states.

According to the game machine B13, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines B1 to B12, the state maintained in the flow-down region can be changed in a plurality of states. For example, an infestation means that appears and disappears at regular intervals may be provided in the flow-down region, or the inclination angle of the inclined plate arranged between the first entrance and the second entrance may be changed. You may control it.

<Compact device for left and right distribution of game balls>
In a game machine including a game board main body and a flow-down means configured to allow the game ball to flow down in a manner of distributing the game ball to a plurality of entrances behind the front end surface of the game board main body, the game board main body is The flow means includes an arrangement area in which nails that can distribute the flow path of the game ball can be arranged and a non-arrangement area in which nails cannot be arranged. A game machine C1 characterized in that it is arranged in a range including the rear of the installation area.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a swing configured so that the game ball can flow down toward the first and second entrances, which are provided on the left and right sides, and the first or second entrance. There is a gaming machine provided with a branch channel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144471, especially FIG. 4). The distribution flow path is formed of a resin material, and a game ball is formed so that the game ball can flow down inside the distribution flow path. On the upstream side of the second ball entry port (position immediately before the ball enters), a gap having a size that allows the game ball to pass through is formed.

However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the first entrance and the second entrance are configured to project toward the front side of the game board, the game area can be formed on the front side of the distribution flow path. There was a problem that it was difficult. In other words, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of securing a large range of formation of the game area.

In other words, the area required for arranging the first and second entrances is partially overhanging the front side of the game board, so that the other range in which the game ball can flow down is widened. There is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game ball flows down may be reduced due to the narrowing.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C1, since the flow-down means is arranged behind the front end surface of the game board main body, another member for guiding the game ball is provided on the front side of the front end face of the game board main body. Since it can be arranged, a large range of formation of the game area can be secured.

In the game machine C1, the plurality of entrances are provided with a first entrance, and the first entrances are arranged so as not to overlap with a movable accessory arranged in the game area in front view. A game machine C2 characterized by.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1, it is possible to prevent the visibility of the game ball entering the first ball entry port from being lowered by the movable accessory.

In the game machine C1 or C2, at least a part of the flow path of the game ball that flows down from the first entry port is arranged at a position where it overlaps with the movable accessory arranged in the game area in front view. A game machine C3 characterized by.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C1 or C2, the game ball that deviates from the first entrance and flows down can be hidden by a movable accessory.

In any of the game machines C1 to C3, the flow-down means includes a direction switching unit configured to allow the player side to flow down the game ball on the upstream side of the plurality of entrances. Machine C4.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C3, the direction switching unit causes the game ball flowing down the flow-down means to flow to the player side in front of a plurality of entrances. It is possible to improve the visibility of the ball and improve the attention to the game ball flowing down toward a plurality of entrances.

The game machine C4 is characterized in that the game machine C4 is provided with a distribution means for distributing the flow direction of the game ball at the front position of the direction switching portion on the front side of the game board main body.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, the game ball can be sorted by the sorting means even at the front position of the game board main body where it is difficult to hit a nail. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the game area can be improved.

In the game machine C5, the game ball provided with the ball entry means in which at least a part of the game balls distributed by the distribution means can be entered, and the game ball that has flowed down the flow-down means and has flowed down the direction switching portion is The game machine C6 is characterized in that the game ball discharged to the back side and flows down the flow-down means is configured to be visible through the game board main body.

According to the game machine C6, the subsequent visibility of the game ball that has flowed down the direction switching portion is reduced, so that it is possible to make the illusion that the game ball has entered the ball entry means. As a result, the game balls that flow down the flow-down means can be added to the number of game balls that flow down toward the entry means, and a large number of game balls appear to flow down toward the entry means. Can be done.

In this case, the game ball flowing down the flow-down means and the game ball flowing down the front side of the game board body are separated by the game board body and cannot collide with each other, so that the game ball actually flows down toward the ball entry means. It is possible to prevent the flow of the flowing game ball from being obstructed by the game ball flowing down the flow means. That is, while ensuring the entry efficiency of the game balls that are actually flowing down toward the entry means, the player is made to appear as if more game balls are flowing down toward the entry means. can do.

The game machine C1 includes a first ball entry port, a second ball entry port, and a first flow path in which a game ball can flow down toward the first ball entry port, and the first flow path thereof. C7 is a gaming machine C7 provided with a branched flow path on the upstream side of the first entry port, in which a game ball flows in a direction deviating from the first entry port.

According to the game machine C7, even if a ball clogging occurs on the first ball entry side in the first flow path, the game ball can be discharged from the branched flow path, so that the ball clogging can be easily cleared. Can be done.

In the game machine C7, the first flow path advances the game ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first entry port and the second entry port on the upstream side of the first entry port. The game machine C8 is configured to deflect the game ball from the first entrance.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a swing configured so that the game ball can flow down toward the first and second entrances, which are provided on the left and right sides, and the first or second entrance. There is a gaming machine provided with a branch channel (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-144471, especially FIG. 4). The distribution flow path is formed of a resin material, and a game ball is formed so that the game ball can flow down inside the distribution flow path. On the upstream side of the second ball entry port (position immediately before the ball enters), a gap having a size that allows the game ball to pass through is formed.

However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, a gap portion formed in a size capable of discharging the game ball on the upstream side of the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port discharges the game ball in the left-right direction. In order to secure a passage area for the game ball, a flow path for flowing the game ball toward the first entry port and a flow path for causing the game ball to flow down toward the second entry port are formed. Since it is necessary to leave a space between the left and right sides of the arrangement of the flow path for the ball, which is equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, the first ball is compared with the actual left and right widths of the first ball and the second ball. There is a problem that the left-right width for arranging the mouth and the second ball entrance becomes excessive.

In other words, the left-right width (area) required for arranging the first entrance and the second entrance becomes excessive, so that a flow path of the game ball can be formed on the front side or the rear side of the game board. There is a problem that the range is narrowed and the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game ball flows down may be reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine C8, the configuration for deflecting the game ball from the first entry port is configured to advance the game ball in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line, so that the first entry port is used. Since it is possible to eliminate the need for the distance from the second entry port to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the game ball, it is possible to suppress the left-right width (region) for arranging the first entry opening and the second entry opening. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the range in which the game ball flows down.

The mode of designing the range in which the game ball flows down is not limited at all. For example, it may be an aspect of designing a region between the game board and the glass plate of the door frame (so-called game area), or a region behind the front end surface of the game board (for example, a resin interior). It may be the design aspect of the flow path). In the former case, an aspect of designing the arrangement of nails to be driven into the game board as a member for guiding the game ball is also included.

The game machine C8 includes a second flow path that allows the game ball to flow down toward the second entry port, and the second flow path is located on the upstream side of the second entry port. A gaming machine characterized in that the game ball is advanced in a direction intersecting a predetermined straight line connecting the first entrance and the second entrance, and the game ball is deflected from the second entrance. C9.

According to the game machine C9, in addition to the effect played by the game machine C8, the left-right width (region) for arranging the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port can be further suppressed.

In the game machine C8 or C9, there is a second flow path in which the game ball can flow down toward the second entry port, and a game ball that has flowed down the first flow path and is the first entry port. A game machine characterized by comprising a game ball deviating from the second flow path and a receiving means capable of accepting the game ball deviating from the second entrance. C10.

According to the game machine C10, in addition to the effect of the game machine C8 or C9, the means for accepting the game ball deviating from the first entry port and the means for accepting the game ball deviating from the second entry port are single. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the cost of parts by reducing the number of parts.

In the game machine C10, the receiving means is arranged on the front side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the game machine C11, in addition to the effect of the game machine C10, the visibility of the game ball accepted by the receiving means can be improved, so that the game ball that has entered the flow-down means is the first entrance or the first ball entrance. It is possible to easily determine whether the ball has passed through the second entrance, or has been deviated from the first and second entrances and accepted by the receiving means.

In the game machine C10, the receiving means is arranged on the back side of the predetermined straight line.

According to the game machine C12, in addition to the effect of the game machine C10, the visibility of the flow-down means can be improved as compared with the case where the flow path of the game ball is formed on the front side of the flow-down means. It is possible to easily determine that the game ball is passing through the first ball entry port and the second ball entry port arranged on the downstream side of the flow-down means.

<Direction is performed on the side that is easy to see, and evacuation is performed as a move to the side that is difficult to see>
A moving means capable of moving between a first position for performing an operation effect and a second position different from the first position is provided, and the second position is a position where the visibility of the moving means is lower than that of the first position. The game machine D1 characterized by being.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine provided with a rotary motion member pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-900214). However, in the above-mentioned conventional game machine, since the rotary motion member is always visible inside the opening, the player can see the posture shift of the rotary motion member due to poor control or the rotary motion member after over-rotation. There is a problem that it is easy to be visually recognized and there is a possibility that the effect of the effect is reduced.

On the other hand, according to the game machine D1, the visibility of the moving means at the second position is lower than that at the first position where the motion effect is executed. Even if this occurs, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the state, and it is possible to prevent the effect from being lowered.

The mode for reducing the visibility of the moving means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, regardless of whether it is a transparent member or an opaque member, a member that blocks the field of view may be arranged between the moving means and the player, and the moving means may be displayed on a liquid crystal display that easily attracts the attention of the player. It may be a mode in which the device is displaced (retracted) outward from the area on the front side of the device.

In the game machine D1, the game machine D2 is characterized in that the first position is arranged on the front side of the game machine more than the second position.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect of the game machine D1, the visible size of the moving means itself can be expanded by moving the moving means from the second position to the first position.

In the game machine D2, the moving means is capable of rotating on a predetermined rotation axis, and the front-rear arrangement is changed by the rotation operation of the game machine D3.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, it is possible to change the front-rear arrangement of the moving means while eliminating the need to translate the moving means back and forth. Therefore, the structure for changing the front-rear arrangement of the moving means can be simplified.

The game machine D4 is characterized in that any one of the game machines D1 to D3 is provided with an auxiliary means for assisting the state of the moving means arranged at the second position to be kept on an appropriate side.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D3, by optimizing the state of the moving means by the auxiliary means at the second position, the effect of the moving means at the first position is appropriately produced. Can be executed.

The mode of assistance is not limited in any way. For example, the posture of the moving means may be corrected to an appropriate side by abutting, or the moving means may be maintained on an appropriate side by an urging force.

In the game machine D4, the auxiliary means is arranged on the second position side with respect to the first position.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4, by placing the auxiliary means on the inconspicuous side, the auxiliary means can be easily hidden. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the need for a separate member for hiding the auxiliary means, and it is possible to secure a space on the front side of the auxiliary means as an effect space.

The mode of arrangement on the second position side is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be simply an inconspicuous side, a rear side in the front-rear direction, or an outer side of the central opening of the game board facing the liquid crystal device.

In the game machine D5, the second position is set on the back side of the game machine with respect to the first position, and when the moving means is arranged at the second position, the moving means causes the player to use the auxiliary means. A game machine D6 characterized in that it is arranged so as to block the line of sight.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D5, the auxiliary means can be hidden by using the moving means, so that it is easy to avoid the exposure of the auxiliary means by any chance, and when the moving means is evacuated. It looks good. As a result, the degree of freedom in designing the auxiliary means can be increased.

In any of the game machines D1 to D6, the movement of the moving means is a first movement toward the first position and a second movement for arranging the moving means in a state in which the first movement is possible. The gaming machine D7 is composed of movement, and is configured to bring the state of the moving means closer to an appropriate side at the time of the second movement.

According to the game machine D7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D1 to D6, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an improper state when moving toward the first position.

In the game machine D7, the moving means is characterized in that the state is brought closer to an appropriate side by an urging force.

According to the game machine D8, the means of transportation can be brought closer to the proper side without depending on the control.

In the game machine D7 or D8, the game machine D9 is characterized in that the second movement is a rotation operation about a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the game machine D9, in addition to the effect of the game machine D7 or D8, the state of the moving means can be changed so as to approach the proper side during the change of the posture of the moving means.

In any of the game machines D7 to D9, the game machine D10 is characterized in that the front side and the back side of the moving means are formed in different modes at the time of the first movement.

According to the game machine D10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines D7 to D9, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a shape suitable for functionality. be able to.

<Production that changes the surface of the production device>
A first means capable of performing a predetermined effect is provided, and the first means can be changed into a first posture for performing the first effect and a second posture for performing the second effect as the predetermined effect. , The gaming machine E1 characterized in that the side facing the front changes between the first posture and the second posture.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine provided with a posture changing member pivotally supported by a movable body that moves up and down inside an opening facing an image display device (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-900214). However, in the conventional game machine described above, the posture changing member always faces the same side toward the front side, and the appearance does not change beyond the change in posture. Therefore, the effect of using the posture changing member is improved. There was a problem that there was room for improvement from the viewpoint.

On the other hand, according to the game machine E1, the side facing the front of the first means is configured to change between the first posture and the second posture, so that each of the single movable means called the first means By designing the side surfaces in different modes, the side to be seen (front side) can be changed, so that the first means can be made to look like a completely different object to the player. Therefore, it can be improved from the viewpoint of improving the effect of the first means.

The mode of the predetermined effect is not limited to any one, and various modes are exemplified. For example, an operation effect in which at least a part of the first means operates may be used, or a light emission effect using the light emitted from the light emitting means included in the first means may be used.

In the game machine E1, the first means includes a predetermined light emitting means arranged along a predetermined shape so that the figure can be visually recognized by the emitted light, and the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is the said. The gaming machine E2 is characterized in that it can be changed between the first posture and the second posture.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine E1, the effect of the first means can be improved by changing the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means.

The mode of the change of the figure visually recognized by the predetermined light emitting means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the figure to be visually recognized may be changed by controlling the light emitting pattern of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means in the stopped state, or the light emitting state of each light emitting element of the predetermined light emitting means is fixed and predetermined. The figure (afterimage, etc.) to be visually recognized may be changed by operating the light emitting means, or a combination thereof may be used.

In the game machine E1 or E2, the first means is movable between the first position and the second position, and the outer shape of the first means that is visible at the first position and the outer shape of the first means that are visible at the second position. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the outer shape of the first means is different from that of the possible first means.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, the first means is configured to change the outer shape that is visually recognized while moving, so that an effect that is difficult to realize with a single member can be achieved. It can be visually recognized by the player. Thereby, the effect of the first means can be improved.

In the game machine E3, the game machine E4 is characterized in that a region in which the first means can perform an effect operation is set according to an effect mode.

According to the game machine E4, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3, the area required for the effect operation executed by the first means is configured to change in magnitude according to the mode of the effect, so that the first means Even if the area in which the first means can perform the effect effect changes depending on the arrangement of the first means, the first means can be operated in the mode of the effect according to the area, so that the degree of freedom in designing the operation effect of the first means can be increased. Can be improved.

The game machine E3 or E4 includes a dividing means arranged so as to divide the first means arranged at the first position in a predetermined directional view.

According to the game machine E5, in addition to the effect of the game machine E3 or E4, the appearance of the first means at the first position and the appearance of the first means at the second position (non-division) are determined by the dividing means. Can be different.

In any of the game machines E3 to E5, in the predetermined light emitting means, the figure visually recognized in the first posture at the first position corresponds to the shape of the progress assisting means that assists the progress of the game ball in the game area. A game machine E6 characterized by being configured as such.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E3 to E5, the light emission in the first posture can produce an effect of suggesting the traveling direction of the game ball to the player. In addition to a single effect, it can also be used as an effect related to the direction of travel of the game ball.

The mode of the progress assisting means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, it may be a metal rail including a portion that guides the launch ball to the game area, a guide means that is arranged in the game area and guides the flow of the game ball, or a state that allows or limits the passage of the game ball. It may be a ball passing state switching means that can be switched with.

The game machine E7 is characterized in that, in the game machine E6, the figure visually recognized in the second posture at the second position is a figure for paying attention to a predetermined ball entry area where the game ball can enter.

According to the game machine E7, in addition to the effect of the game machine E6, another aspect of the light effect can be performed by a single first means as a light effect executed for the same purpose. This makes it easier for the player to prevent the player from getting bored with the production.

In any of the game machines E3 to E7, the movement of the first means is a first movement toward the first position and a second for arranging the moving means in a state in which the first movement is possible. The gaming machine E8 is composed of the movement of the first means, and is configured to bring the state of the first means closer to an appropriate side at the time of the second movement.

According to the game machine E8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E3 to E7, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the moving means is in an improper state when moving toward the first position.

In the game machine E8, the first means is a game machine E9 characterized in that the state is brought closer to an appropriate side by an urging force.

According to the game machine E9, in addition to the effect of the game machine E8, the first means can be brought closer to an appropriate side without depending on the control.

In the game machine E8 or E9, the game machine E10 is characterized in that the second movement is a rotation operation about a predetermined rotation axis.

According to the game machine E10, in addition to the effect of the game machine E8 or E9, the state can be changed so that the moving means is brought closer to an appropriate side while the posture of the displacement means is being changed.

In any of the game machines E8 to E10, the game machine E11 is characterized in that the front side and the back side of the displacement means are formed in different modes at the time of the first movement.

According to the game machine E11, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines E8 to E10, the front side seen by the player is formed in a shape suitable for decoration, and the back side is formed in a shape suitable for functionality. be able to.

<Support structure of the operated member>
A displacement means configured to be displaceable and a support means for supporting the displacement means are provided, and the support means can limit the displacement of the displacement means and the allowable portion that can tolerate the displacement of the displacement means. A gaming machine F1 characterized by including a limiting portion.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a game machine including a rotary operation member in which a movable unit that moves up and down by driving a pair of left and right drive devices is rotationally driven by individual drive devices (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-000482). See publication). However, in the conventional game machine described above, since the movable unit is supported by the plate portions extending vertically on both the left and right sides in a manner of linearly moving in the vertical direction, the drive timings of the pair of left and right drive devices are deviated. When a load is generated in the direction in which the posture of the movable unit collapses (tilts), the smoothness of the operation of the movable unit is lost, and the operating resistance increases, which increases the possibility of damaging the power transmission system. was there. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of directivity and durability.

On the other hand, according to the game machine F1, the support means for supporting the displacement means includes a limit portion for limiting the displacement of the displacement means and an allowance portion for allowing the displacement of the displacement means, so that the displacement means is driven. Even if the drive timing is deviated, the displacement of the displacement means with respect to the support means is allowed in advance. Therefore, the smooth operation of the displacement means can be maintained within the allowable width, and the space between the support means and the displacement means can be maintained. The load applied to the displacement means can be reduced. This makes it possible to improve the effectability and durability.

Further, as the support mode of the displacement means, two support modes can be configured by appropriately selecting whether to increase the ratio of the influence of the allowable portion or the ratio of the influence of the limiting portion. it can.

In the conventional game machine, the movable unit has been described as being displaced in the vertical direction, but the displacement direction of the displacement means is not limited at all. For example, it may be in the vertical direction, in the horizontal direction, in the front-rear direction, in the rotation direction centered on a predetermined rotation axis, or in any combination thereof.

The shape of the allowable portion and the restrictive portion can be arbitrarily set, and various aspects are exemplified. For example, the allowable portion may be formed as an elongated hole extending in the first direction, and the limiting portion may be formed in a perfect circular shape having a diameter shorter than the longitudinal dimension of the allowable portion.

The game machine F1 is characterized in that the permissible portion is configured so that the displacement of the displacement means can be tolerated in a state where the displacement of the restricted portion of the displacement means is restricted by the restrictor. Game machine F2.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, the displacement of the displacement means with the limiting portion as the base end can be allowed. As a result, it is possible to easily secure the smoothness of the displacement of the displacement means because the control is not required, as compared with the case where the presence or absence of the displacement limitation is switched by the electric control.

In the game machine F1 or F2, the permissible portion has a first permissible state in which the displacement of the displacement means is allowed by the first permissible width, and a second permissible width in which the displacement of the displacement means is smaller than the first permissible width. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that it is configured so that the state can be changed by a second permissible state and a permissible second permissible state.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1 or F2, even if the displacement width corresponding to the type of displacement of the displacement means is different, it is possible to correspond to the different displacement width by one permissible part. it can.

In the game machine F3, the state change is caused by a change in the posture of the displacement means.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of the game machine F3, the change in the posture of the displacement means causes a change in the allowable width allowed by the allowable portion. Since it is possible to directly connect the size of the permissible width of the displacement means, it is possible to avoid the malfunction of the displacement means in advance. Further, the number of constituent members can be reduced as compared with the case where another limiting member for holding down the displacement means and limiting the displacement is adopted.

In the game machine F4, the displacement means is supported by the support means so as to be displaced along the first direction, and in the first allowable state, the direction of displacement of the displacement means allowed by the allowable portion is said. The gaming machine F5 is included on a predetermined plane parallel to the first direction, and the second permissible state is characterized in that the direction of displacement of the displacement means allowed by the permissible portion intersects the predetermined plane.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effect of the game machine F4, the allowable width of displacement by the allowable part can be changed by switching the direction allowed by the allowable part as the direction of displacement of the displacement means with respect to the first direction. it can.

As a result, in relation to the control of the driving device that drives the displacement means, the posture of the displacement means is maintained in the first allowable state in a range in which the displacement means and the support means are likely to be displaced in the first direction. By setting the posture of the displacement means to the second permissible state within the range where it is possible to prevent the displacement, or to prevent the displacement, the displacement of the displacement means is not too soft and not too hard, and is sharp. It can be in a certain displacement mode.

In any of the game machines F3 to F5, the displacement means supports an operating means configured to be operable, the operating means is configured to be operable at high speed, and the allowable portion is the first to operate at high speed. 2 A game machine F6 characterized in that it can be executed in a state where it is in an allowable state.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F3 to F5, it is possible to easily prevent the displacement means from being displaced due to the inertial load generated by the high-speed operation of the moving means.

In any of the game machines F1 to F6, the game machine F7 is characterized in that the support means is composed of a pair of members that support the displacement means from both sides.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F6, the displacement means can be stably supported.

In the game machine F7, the pair of members are configured to be rotatable and displaceable with the first axis as a coaxial center, and the permissible width of the permissible portion is formed so as to extend along the first axis direction. Game machine F8.

According to the game machine F8, in addition to the effect of the game machine F7, the displacement of the displacement means within the permissible width allowed for the permissible portion can be caused on the tangent plane of the cylinder centered on the first axis. it can. In other words, the displacement allowed in the permissible portion can be generated as a displacement in a mode in which the displacement means is twisted with respect to the first axis.

As a result, it is possible to three-dimensionally deal with the displacement of the displacement amount that cannot be avoided such as backlash that may occur when the gears are used for the drive transmission mechanisms on both the left and right sides, and the rotation of the displacement means about the first axis Displacement can be generated smoothly.

In the game machine F8, the game machine F9 is characterized in that one of the supporting means includes the limiting portion.

According to the game machine F9, in addition to the effect of the game machine F8, it is possible to tolerate a misalignment at the time of assembling the other supporting means and the moving means, and it is possible to facilitate the assembling.

In any of the game machines F1 to F9, the allowable portion is formed as an elongated hole, and the limiting portion is formed as an elongated hole whose longitudinal direction is shorter than the longitudinal direction of the allowable portion. F10.

According to the game machine F10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F9, the moving means can be slid and moved in the longitudinal direction of the limiting portion and the allowable portion. As a result, it is possible to release the load generated in the moving means and utilize it for the operation effect of the moving means.

<Technical concept in which multiple types of fixing forces for transportation are set>
A movable moving means and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the moving means are provided, and the load applying means can switch the load to be applied according to the state of the moving means. A game machine G1 characterized by.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines provided with regulating means (load applying means) configured to be able to move the movement of the moving means that is displaced up and down to a position where the movement can be regulated (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-54856). See). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, although the movement of the moving means can be regulated by the regulating means, no further effect can be expected, and the cost-effectiveness for the volume integral occupied by the regulating means is low. That is, there is a problem that there is room for improvement from the viewpoint of effectively utilizing the regulatory means.

On the other hand, according to the game machine G1, the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be switched according to the state of the moving means. There are multiple types of effects that can affect movement. That is, the load applying means can be effectively used.

The mode of the state of the moving means adopted as the reference for switching the load of the load applying means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, as a difference in the state of the moving means, a difference in the arrangement of the moving means may be adopted, or a difference in the operation mode may be adopted.

The state in which the operation mode is different includes, for example, a state in which the moving means actively operates and an operation of another moving means held by the moving means or another movable means arranged outside the moving means. An example is a passively operating state.

The mode of switching the load to be applied is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the direction of the load based on the moving direction of the moving means may be switched (the direction facing the moving direction of the moving means and the direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means) may be switched. However, the mode of the load applied by the load applying means may be switched depending on the elapsed time from the start of movement of the moving means.

Further, as the mode of switching the load, the size of the load may be switched, or the mode of generating the load may be switched. The load generation mode may be, for example, a frictional force (brake) due to rubbing against the moving means, or a regulatory force (stopper) generated when the limit of its own movement allowable width is reached. ..

In the game machine G1, the load applying means is divided into an opposed state in which a load is applied in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means and an intersecting state in which a load is applied in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means. The gaming machine G2 characterized in that the load to be applied can be switched.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1, the load applied to the moving means can be switched from the load applying means by changing the arrangement of the load applying means with respect to the moving path of the moving means. The complicated shape for switching the load is not required, and the load applying means can be easily configured.

In the game machine G1 or G2, the load applying means includes a load applying moving means that can move in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means, and the load applying moving means is configured to be in contact with the moving means. A game machine G3 characterized by being played.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G1 or G2, the load applying moving means can be configured to perform the appearance and disappearance of the moving means with respect to the moving path by a linear motion (linear motion). , The movement width (movement width in consideration of the variation in operation) required for the load application moving means in order to switch the mode of the load applied from the load applying means to the moving means can be reduced.

Therefore, the space for arranging the load applying moving means can be suppressed. In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, the space for arranging the moving means and the load applying means is usually limited to the inside of the size (volume) determined by a predetermined standard, so that the loading moving means is arranged. By suppressing the space of the above, the degree of freedom in arranging the moving means and the load applying means can be improved.

The game machine G3 is characterized in that the load applying means is configured so that the moving direction intersects the moving direction of the moving means at a right angle, and the movement of the moving means in the moving direction is restricted. Game machine G4 to play.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, it is possible to increase the difference in the mode of the load applied to the moving means with the minimum moving width of the load applying means.

In any of the game machines G1 to G4, the switching of the load applied by the load applying means is executed corresponding to the position of the moving means.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G4, it is possible to deal with the case where the effect operation of the moving means is configured to be different depending on the position.

For example, when the moving means includes a predetermined operating means, the operating means operates at a high speed when the position of the moving means is stopped, while the operating means operates at a stopped or low speed when the moving means moves. When the effect is executed, there may be a demand for the moving means to be securely fixed when the position of the moving means is stopped, while a request for loose fixing (braking) when the moving means moves. Can occur.

By making the switching of the load applied by the load applying means executed according to the position of the moving means, it is possible to satisfy different demands due to the difference in the arrangement of the moving means.

In any of the game machines G1 to G5, the load applying means applies a load when the moving means moves in the forward direction, while applying a load when the moving means moves in the opposite direction. A game machine G6 characterized by being released.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G5, it is possible to deal with the difference between the forward and reverse movement directions depending on the presence or absence (large or small) of the load from the load applying means.

A feature of any of the game machines G1 to G6 is that a driving means for generating a driving force for moving the moving means is provided, and a separation load generated in a direction in which the moving means and the driving means are separated is generated. Game machine G7 to play.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines G1 to G6, a separation load is generated, so that the moving means can be separated from the driving means, and the transmission efficiency of the driving force can be lowered. ..

In the game machine G7, the separation load is generated from the load applying means.

According to the game machine G8, in addition to the effects of the game machine G7, the load applying means can be configured with multiple functions.

In the game machine G7, the separation load is generated in the drive means.

According to the game machine G9, in addition to the effect of the game machine G7, the transmission efficiency of the driving force can be reduced on the upstream side of the driving force transmission path.

In any of the game machines G1 to G9, a case where a frictional force is applied from the load applying means to the moving means and a case where the load applying means restricts the movement of the moving means can be configured. A game machine G10 characterized by.

According to the game machine G10, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G1 to G9, even when the moving means is moved by generating the same driving force, the variation of the moving mode of the moving means is increased. be able to.

<The modes of multiple guidance means that guide the movement of the transportation means are different>
It is characterized by including a movable moving means, a first guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means, and a second guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means in a manner different from the first guiding means. Game machine H1.

In a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, there is a gaming machine in which the moving means is guided by a pair of guiding means having the same embodiment (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-157744). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the mode of the load applied to the pair of parts guided by the guiding means, which is the part of the moving means, is common, and the same applies to the improvement of durability. Since it is necessary to increase the strength, there is a problem that the degree of freedom in designing the moving means (the part that is guided by the pair of guiding means) is lowered.

On the other hand, according to the game machine H1, the guidance modes of the first guiding means and the second guiding means for guiding the movement of the moving means are different, so that it is necessary for the mode of the applied load and the improvement of the durability. The intensity numbers can be different. Therefore, since the shape and strength of the portion of the moving means that is guided by the plurality of guiding means can be configured to be different, the portion of the moving means (the portion that is guided by the plurality of guiding means). ) Can improve the degree of freedom in design.

The difference between the modes of the first guide means and the second guide means is not limited in any way, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the first guide means may be configured as a guide rail, the second guide means may be configured as a guide hole, and the first guide means is a rotation guide means pivotally supported by a predetermined rotation axis. , The second guide means may be configured as a guide groove, or the combination of each configuration may be changed.

For example, when the first guide means and the second guide means are guide grooves, the grooves may be extended in parallel directions in the first guide means and the second guide means, but the widths of the grooves may be different. The first guide means and the second guide means may have a mode in which the extending directions of the grooves are non-parallel, while the widths of the grooves are common.

In the game machine H1, the game machine H2 is characterized in that at least a part of the second guide means is arranged along the first guide means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect of the game machine H1, at least a part of the second guide means follows the first guide means, so that the moving means can be operated in two stages.

In the game machine H2, the second guiding means includes an annex portion along the first guide means and an auxiliary portion for guiding the moving means in a direction different from the case of being guided by the annex portion. The featured game machine H3.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect of the game machine H2, it is possible to change the moving direction in which the moving means is guided at the boundary between the side-by-side portion and the auxiliary portion. Therefore, the moving mode of the moving means can be complicated.

In any of the game machines H1 to H3, a transmission means for transmitting a driving force for moving the moving means to the moving means is provided, and the displacement direction of the transmitting means is one direction regardless of the moving direction of the moving means. A game machine H4 characterized by being fixed to.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H1 to H3, the design of the driving force transmission system is facilitated as compared with the case where the displacement direction of the transmission means is switched during the movement of the moving means. be able to.

The gaming machine H4 is characterized in that the transmitting means is configured to transmit a driving force via a guided portion guided by the second guiding means.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect of the game machine H4, the driving force is transmitted via the guided portion guided by the narrow second guiding means, so that the guided portion at the time of transmitting the driving force is transmitted. It is possible to suppress misalignment.

In the game machine H5, the guided portion is configured to overtake the auxiliary guide portion guided by the first guide means in the moving direction of the transmission means.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of the game machine H5, the total weight of the auxiliary guide portion side is applied to the guided portion side, and the moving means is driven against the total weight. The driving force required at the start of movement can be reduced.

In any of the game machines H2 to H6, when the moving means is guided to the side-by-side portion, the first moving means of the moving means is rotated in a rotation direction with the second guiding means side of the moving means as a rotation axis. In a state where the guiding means side is urged and the moving means is guided to the auxiliary portion, the second guiding means side of the moving means moves in a rotation direction with the first guiding means side of the moving means as a rotation axis. A game machine H7 characterized by being urged.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H2 to H6, when the roller guided by the guiding means is adopted as a configuration, it becomes easy to rotate the roller, so that the roller as a guided member Wear can be reduced.

In any of the game machines H3 to H7, when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary portion, the moving means is maintained in a predetermined portion of the first guiding means, and the first guiding means is the first. 2 A game machine H8 characterized in that it is formed wider than the guide means.

According to the game machine H8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H3 to H7, the maintenance in the predetermined portion can be performed by the wide first guiding means, so that the moving means guided by the auxiliary portion. Can stabilize the movement of. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the portion that is a part of the moving means and is guided by the second guiding means from becoming unstable when passing through the boundary between the side-by-side portion and the auxiliary portion. As a result, the movement of the moving means can be stabilized, and smooth step switching can be performed when the movement is configured to be switched stepwise.

Further, since the support area in the predetermined portion of the first guide means can be increased, it is possible to easily avoid the occurrence of local wear between the moving means and the first guide means.

In the game machine H8, the predetermined portion is configured to suppress at least a vertical displacement of the moving means.

According to the game machine H9, in addition to the effect of the game machine H8, it is possible to reduce the load required to move the moving means in the portion guided by the first guiding means.

In the game machine H8 or H9, the game machine H10 is characterized in that the electrical wiring connected to the moving means is arranged through the first guide means.

According to the game machine H10, in addition to the effect of the game machine H8 or H9, a sufficient cross-sectional area through which the electric wiring is passed can be secured, and the displacement of the electric wiring when the moving means is guided to the auxiliary portion can be obtained. Since it can be suppressed, the durability of the electric wiring can be improved.

In any of the game machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10, the game machine is a slot machine. Game machine Z1 to play. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine. Game machine Z2. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area in response to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. Further, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A10, B1 to B13, C1 to C12, D1 to D10, E1 to E11, F1 to F10, G1 to G10, and H1 to H10, the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. A gaming machine Z3 characterized by being fused. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (game board body)
60 Base plate (arrangement area)
60a Through hole (non-dispersed area)
62 Outer rail (progress assisting means)
65a Specified winning opening (part of profit passage means)
140a Electric accessory (movable accessory)
241 Upper component (part of fixed member)
244b Protruding part (first positioning part)
247 Decorative part (dividing means)
251b Central light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
251c Ambient light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
251d Far light emitting means (part of light emitting means)
261 Lower component (part of fixed member)
270 Upper connecting member (connecting member)
272 1st overhang (part of guide, 1st guide)
274 3rd overhang (part of guide, 2nd guide)
279 Protruding part (second positioning part)
290 Thin plate member (thin wall decorative member)
310 First component (part of flow-down means)
317 Direction switching part 320 Aperture forming part (sorting means)
410 Central component (second member)
413a ridge (deceleration ridge)
450 Left component (part of the flow area, first member)
453a Side wall (part of passage area)
455 Ceiling plate (upstream means)
455a Extended plate part (part of passing area)
457 1st ball guide (1st ball entrance)
459 2nd ball guide (2nd entrance)
490 Wide decorative member (decorative means)
630 Lifting plate member (part of transportation means, transmission means)
648 drive motor (drive means)
650 resistance generator (load applying means)
653 Front-rear displacement member (loading moving means)
672 1st elongated hole (1st guiding means)
673 2nd long hole (part of the 2nd guide means, annexed part)
674 Curved elongated hole (part of the second guide means, auxiliary part)
680 Displacement member (part of support means)
684 Cylindrical part (rotating shaft, auxiliary guide part)
686 Metal rod-shaped member (guided part)
695 Cylindrical member (auxiliary means)
700 Luminous operation production unit (part of transportation means)
710 Main body member (part of displacement means)
760 Intermediate connecting member (part of supporting means)
764a long hole (allowable part)
764b Support hole (restriction part)
800 rotation effect device (part of transportation means, part of first means)
810 Rotating member (part of first means, predetermined light emitting means, part of operating means)
3982l discharge gutter (acceptance means)
4985l discharge gutter (accepting means)
7674a Recessed part (predetermined part)
10831a Weight (auxiliary means)
J1 central axis (first axis, rotation axis)
KG2 nail (part of guidance means)
SE1a detection hole (first ball entry port, second ball entry port, part of ball entry means)
TR1 1st passage (1st passage)
TR2 2nd passage (2nd passage)

Claims (3)

It is provided with a movable means and a load applying means capable of applying a load to the moving means.
The load applying means is a gaming machine characterized in that the load to be applied can be switched according to the state of the moving means. The load applying means switches between a facing state in which a load is applied in a direction opposite to the moving direction of the moving means and an intersecting state in which a load is applied in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the gaming machine is made possible. The load applying means includes a load applying moving means capable of moving in a direction intersecting the moving direction of the moving means.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the load-applying moving means is configured to be in contact with the moving means.

Images